Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００２
2009 Pilot
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００３
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
on the vehicle.
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００４
2009 Pilot
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
414
453
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iv
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００５
2009 Pilot
(fluid capacities and tire pressures)
(main controls)
(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)
(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)
(climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink)
(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)
(engine and transmission operation)
(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)
(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)
(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)
(warranty and contact information)
(how to order)
Contents
................................................................................................................................................Index .I
Service Information Summary
...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance .3
............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety .5
.......Instruments and Controls .63
....Features .189
.......................................................................Before Driving .397
.........................................................................................Driving .413
.................................................Maintenance .457
.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected .511
..............................................Technical Information .539
..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 557
..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) .561
1
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００６
Owner's Identification Form
2010 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual
00X31-SZA-6002
© 2008 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2009 Pilot
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment system, and other
convenience features.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Before Driving
Driving
Maintenance
Technical Information
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Service Information Summary
Index
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Overview of Contents
2
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００７
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
: If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
GAUGES
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 27)
(P.9, 27)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
HEADPHONE
CONNECTORS
AUDIO SYSTEM
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
MOONROOF SWITCH
HomeLink
BUTTONS
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.171)
(P.167)
(P.136)
(P.163)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.399)
(P.143)
(P.401) (P.167)
(P.346)
(P.417)
(P.190)
(P.197)
(P.206)
(P.168)
(P.356)
(P.166)
(P.80)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.202)
REAR HEATING/
COOLING CONTROLS
(P.195)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.65)
GLASS HATCH
RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACKS
(P.345)
(P.184)
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００８
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped
1:
2:
3:
4 : 4WD models only
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
HORN
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.169)
(P.163)
(P.143)
(P.128)
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
(P.131)
(P.399)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
(P.136)
MIRROR CONTROLS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
(P.171)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.436)
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM
SWITCH
(P.
124)
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.309)
(P.361)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.167)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.34)
(P.
122)
VTM-4 LOCK
BUTTON
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
(P.85)
(P.422)
(P.184)
(P.348)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
(P.390)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON
(P.128, 170)
(P.162)
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
4
3
3
3
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００９
2009 Pilot
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 14
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 20
..Seat Belt System Components . 20
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 24
......Airbag System Components . 24
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 27
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 32
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33
How The Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 33
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 34
.............................Airbag Service . 35
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines .
37
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 37
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 40
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 40
...Additional Safety Precautions . 41
Protecting Infants and
.........................Small Children . 42
.......................Protecting Infants . 42
.........Protecting Small Children . 43
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45
....................Installing a Child Seat . 46
...............................With LATCH . 47
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 51
..............................With a Tether . 52
...........Protecting Larger Children . 55
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 55
..................Using a Booster Seat . 56
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 57
...Additional Safety Precautions . 58
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 59
...................................Safety Labels . 60
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１０
2009 Pilot
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
15
37 58
500
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Control Your Speed
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Important Safety Precautions
6
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１１
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(7)
(9)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(6)
(10)
(8)
(5)
(2)
(11)
(4)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What you should do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
27
30
32
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１４
2009 Pilot
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
10
０８／０３／１０ １７：２８：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１５
2009 Pilot
−
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult
passengers, and teenage children
who are large enough and mature
enough to drive or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Your vehicle also has a tailgate, glass
hatch, and door open indicator on
the multi-information display to
indicate when the tailgate, the glass
hatch, or a specific door is not tightly
closed. You will see the appropriate
indicator(s) and message(s) for each
condition.
When one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
message will come on.
Your vehicle has a door-
openindicatoronthe
instrument panel to indicate when
any door is not tightly closed.
Your vehicle also has a
tailgate, glass hatch, and
door open indicator on the
information display to indicate when
the tailgate, the glass hatch, or a
specific door is not tightly closed.
You will see the appropriate
indicator(s) for each condition.37 58
CONTINUED
On Touring modelsExcept Touring models
Introduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１６
2009 Pilot
Locking the doors, the glass hatch,
and the tailgate reduces the chance
of someone being thrown out of the
vehicle during a crash, and it helps
prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door, the
glass hatch, or the tailgate and
falling out.
Locking the doors, the glass hatch
and the tailgate also helps prevent an
outsider from unexpectedly opening
a door, the glass hatch, or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.When the glass hatch, tailgate, and
one or more doors are not tightly
closed, the ‘‘DOOR, HATCH &
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message will
come on.
When the glass hatch, the tailgate,
or both glass hatch and tailgate are
not tightly closed, the ‘‘HATCH
OPEN,’’ ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN,’’ or
‘‘HATCH & TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page for
how to set them.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See pages
and for how to set them.
137
114 115
Except Touring models
On Touring models
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１７
2009 Pilot
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page for a manual adjustment.
131
152
153
On vehicles with manual adjustable
seats
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１８
2009 Pilot
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
See page for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page for the power adjustable
seat-back.
153
152
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head RestraintsAdjust the Seat-Backs 4.3.
14
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００１９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
thebeltsothelappartfitssnugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
The center seating position in the
second row and all third row seats
have a detachable seat belt that can
be unlatched and retracted into the
ceiling to allow the seats to be folded
down. See page for how to
unlatch and relatch a belt.
Detachable seat belts should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
See page for how to unlatch a
belt, and page for how to relatch
abelt.
155
160
160
161
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２０
2009 Pilot
The front seats and second row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of an anchor,
squeeze the two release buttons, and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
RELEASE BUTTON
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２１
2009 Pilot
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
20
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２２
2009 Pilot
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
18
０８／０３／１０ １７：２９：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２３
2009 Pilot
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２４
2009 Pilot
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
29 30
93
On Touring models
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
20
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２５
2009 Pilot
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
15
51
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２６
2009 Pilot
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
).
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
The lap/shoulder belts in the center
seat of the second row and both of
the third row seats are equipped with
a detachable anchor that has two
parts: a small latch plate and a
buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page .
32
160
do not deploy
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
22
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２７
2009 Pilot
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
494
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２８
2009 Pilot
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
24
(5)
(3)
(2)(9)
(1)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(10)
(11)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(12)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００２９
2009 Pilot
Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
27
30
32
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
(13)
(16)
(15)
(14)
(13) Front Impact Sensors
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３０
2009 Pilot
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
22
29
29
33
31
32
33
34
20
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
０８／０３／１０ １７：３０：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３１
2009 Pilot
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
34
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３２
2009 Pilot
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Dual-Threshold Airbags
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
not latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３３
2009 Pilot
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
Second-row passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT
WEIGHT
SENSOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３４
2009 Pilot
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A second-row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front passenger’s seat
or seat-back forcibly back against
the folded right-side second-row
seat.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
34
495
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
30
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３５
2009 Pilot
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
33
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３６
2009 Pilot
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０８／０３／１０ １７：３１：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３７
2009 Pilot
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
93
70
93
On Touring models
On Touring models
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the SRS Indicator Works
not
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
U.S.
Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３８
2009 Pilot
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Any object(s), such as a folded-
down back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
Additional Information About Your Airbags
34
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
CanadaU.S.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００３９
2009 Pilot
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
CONTINUED
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４０
2009 Pilot
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
36
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４１
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
42 54
55 58
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４２
2009 Pilot
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
34
55
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
38
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４３
2009 Pilot
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４４
2009 Pilot
−
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
17
15
55
13
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Protecting Children General Guidelines
40
０８／０３／１０ １７：３２：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４５
2009 Pilot
−
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
Children who play in
vehicles can accidentally get
trapped inside. Teach your
children not to play in or around
vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate or
the glass hatch, which can lead to
accidental injury or death.
142
51 52
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Lock all doors, the tailgate and the
glass hatch when your vehicle is
not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４６
2009 Pilot
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
maypreventthedriverorafront
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
42
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４７
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４８
2009 Pilot
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
34
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
44
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００４９
2009 Pilot
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the rear seating
positions.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５０
2009 Pilot
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
46
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either outer second row seat:
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at each of the second
row seats and the passenger’s side
third row seat.
When you install a child seat in the
second row seating position, use the
loweranchorsasshowninthe
illustration. You can install up to
three child seats at a time with
LATCH.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Outer LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
LOWER ANCHORS
MARKS
０８／０３／１０ １７：３３：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５２
2009 Pilot
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
3.
4.
5.
155
Installing a Child Seat
48
RIGID TYPE
FLEXIBLE TYPE
TETHER STRAP
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５３
2009 Pilot
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the center seating position on
the second row seat, use the center
lower anchors as shown above.
Follow step 1 through 4 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.
Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page ).
6.
7.
2.
3.
4.
1.
160
Using the Center LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５４
2009 Pilot
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the passenger’s side seating
position of the third row:
Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the passenger’s
side panel. Place the latch plate
and anchor latch in their holding
slots (see page ).
Followsteps1through4ofthe
second row installation on pages
and .
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
47 48
161
Installing a Child Seat
50
LOWER ANCHORS
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５５
2009 Pilot
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
secondroworinthethirdrow,make
sure the detachable seat belt is
securely latched (see page ).
1. 2.
3.
161
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５６
2009 Pilot
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
52
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５７
2009 Pilot
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seat-
back.
For the center seat, lower the head
restraint, then route the tether strap
over the head restraint and seat-back.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
1.
51
CONTINUED
Second Row Installation
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
TETHER STRAP
Outer Seating Position
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５８
2009 Pilot
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seat-
back.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lower the head
restraint.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
51
Third Row Installation
Installing a Child Seat
54
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００５９
2009 Pilot
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３４：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６０
2009 Pilot
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
3.
4.
5.
45
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
56
０８／０３／１０ １７：３５：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６１
2009 Pilot
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
15
55
CONTINUED
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
０８／０３／１０ １７：３５：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６２
2009 Pilot
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
58
０８／０３／１０ １７：３５：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６３
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
With the tailgate/glass hatch open,
airflow can pull exhaust gas into your
vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the tailgate/glass hatch
open, open all the windows and set
the heating and cooling system/
climate control system as shown
below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
59
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３５：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６４
2009 Pilot
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
60
RADIATOR CAP
DASHBOARD
BATTERY LABEL
HOOD
０８／０３／１０ １７：３５：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６５
2009 Pilot
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian modelsU.S. models
U.S. models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
61
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６６
2009 Pilot
62
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６７
2009 Pilot
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 64
............................Instrument Panel . 65
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 67
.............................................Gauges . 80
.............Multi-Information Display . 85
Controls Near the Steering
.........................................Wheel . 121
Windshield Wipers and
.................................Washers . 122
Rear Window Wiper and
...................................Washer . 123
.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 124
...............Hazard Warning Button . 128
...............Rear Window Defogger . 128
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 129
........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 131
.............................Keys and Locks . 132
......................Immobilizer System . 133
..............................Ignition Switch . 135
....................................Door Locks . 136
............Childproof Door Locks . 142
.............Tailgate and Glass Hatch . 142
..........................Power Tailgate . 143
.....................Remote Transmitter . 148
...............................................Seats . 152
...................Detachable Anchor . 160
..................................Seat Heaters . 162
............................Power Windows . 163
.......................................Moonroof . 166
...............................Parking Brake . 167
...........................................Mirrors . 168
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 171
...............................Interior Lights . 174
.........Interior Convenience Items . 177
.........................Center Console . 178
.......Console Compartments . 178
...........................Coin Holder . 179
.....................Beverage Holders . 179
..............Storage Compartment . 180
..................................Glove Box . 181
..............Integrated Sunshades . 181
....................Sunglasses Holder . 181
................Conversation Mirror . 182
...................................Sun Visor . 182
............................Vanity Mirror . 183
................................Coat Hooks . 183
.......................Seat Under Tray . 184
........Accessory Power Sockets . 184
.......................AC Power Outlet . 185
.............................Cargo Hooks . 186
..................................Cargo Net . 186
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
63
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６８
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
: If equipped
Control Locations
64
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
HEADPHONE
CONNECTORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
GAUGES
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 27)
(P.136)
(P.163)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.399)
(P.143)
(P.80)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.166)
HomeLink
BUTTONS MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
REAR HEATING/
COOLING CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.356)
(P.
168)
(P.206)
(P.190)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.197)
(P.417)
(P.195)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.202)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
(P.167)(P.401)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P.346)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.171)
(P.167)
(P.65)
GLASS HATCH
RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH
(P.184)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACKS (P.345)
０８／０４／１４ １８：１７：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００６９
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
4WD models only
If equipped1:
2:
Instrument Panel
LX, EX, and EX-L models
Instruments and Controls
65
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
VTM-4 INDICATOR
LIGHT CONTROL INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR
INFORMATION DISPLAY
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
STARTER SYSTEM INDICATOR
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.75)
(P.68)
(P.75)
(P.68)
(P.77)
(P.77)
(P.74)
(P.71)
(P.77)
(P.72)
(P.71)
(P.76)
(P.81)
(P.73)
(P.76)
(P.70)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.70)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.69)
(P.67)
(P.70)
(P.78)
(P.79)
(P.78)
(P.77)
(P.68)
(P.73)
1
2
2
1
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７０
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
: 4WD models only
Instrument Panel
Touring models
66
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
MESSAGE INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
VTM-4 INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.68)
(P.75)
(P.68)
(P.68)
(P.77)
(P.71)
(P.70)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.70)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.70)
(P.78)
(P.77)
(P.75)
(P.79)
(P.85)
(P.71)
(P.76)
(P.69)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.72)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.74)
(P.67)
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７１
2009 Pilot
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
For more information, see page .20
20
93
On Touring models
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７２
2009 Pilot
The engine can be severely
damaged if this indicator flashes
or stays on when the engine is
running. For more information,
see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message
on the multi-information display
(see page ).
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
For more information, see page
.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ). For more information, see
page .
525
93
525
93
526
93
526
On Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７３
2009 Pilot
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
1.
2.
93
93
527
On Touring models
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
69
U.S. Canada
０８／０３／１０ １７：３６：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７４
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on
for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START
(III) position. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
theABS.Ifthishappens,have
your vehicle checked at a dealer.
With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
For more information, see page
.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).33
93
93
33
433
93
On Touring models On Touring models
On Touring models
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) IndicatorSide Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
70
U.S. Canada
０８／０３／１０ １７：３７：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７５
2009 Pilot
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page
).
This indicator has three functions:
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA or Hill Start
Assist systems. Take your vehicle to
a dealer to have it checked. Without
VSA, your vehicle still has normal
driving ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
See page for more information
on the VSA system.
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA or Hill Start
Assist systems.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
488
93
435
435
435
93
On Touring models
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instruments and Controls
71
０８／０３／１０ １７：３７：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７６
2009 Pilot
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page ).
Check the tire pressure monitor
on the multi-information display
and determine the cause (see page
).
If this happens, pull to the side
of the road when it is safe,
check which tire has lost
pressure on the multi-
information display, and
determine the cause. If it is
because of a flat tire, have the
flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page .
1.
512 94
428
535
535
424
On Touring modelsExcept Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
72
０８／０３／１０ １７：３７：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７７
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on when there
is a problem with the starter system.
For more information, see page .
If you see a ‘‘CHECK STARTER
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the starter system (see
page ).
If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
2.
430
415
94
On Touring models
Except Touring models
Except Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Starter System
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Instruments and Controls
73
U.S. Canada
０８／０３／１０ １７：３７：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７８
2009 Pilot
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
HIGH’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).94
4WD models only
On 4WD Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
A/T Temperature
Indicator
74
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
０８／０３／２８ １５：４５：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００７９
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page ) to see the message (see
page ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
85
93
459
Except Touring models On Touring models 4WD models only
Message IndicatorMaintenance Minder
Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
75
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３７：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８０
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
124
348
348
126
133
Except LX models
Cruise Control Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Lights On IndicatorImmobilizer System
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
76
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８１
2009 Pilot
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
automatic lighting control system.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer as soon as possible.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK LIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display, there
is a problem with the automatic
headlight control system. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
It goes off when your vehicle uses
extra fuel.
This indicator comes on if any door
is not closed tightly.
On Touring models
On Touring models
Except Touring models Except Touring models
Light Control Indicator Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Fuel Economy Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
77
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８２
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
You will see a ‘‘LOW WASHER
FLUID’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘LOW FUEL’’
message on the multi-information
display.This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page ).
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 2.9 U.S. gal (10.8
)offuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
94
481
Except Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Low Fuel IndicatorWasher Level Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
78
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８３
2009 Pilot
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
Your vehicle has a door, glass hatch,
andtailgateopenindicatoronthe
information display. If any door(s),
the glass hatch, or the tailgate is not
closed tightly, the appropriate light/
lights will come on to remind you to
close the tailgate, the glass hatch or
the door(s).
The door, glass hatch, and tailgate
open indicator appears on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator is displayed as the
system message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on along with the low tire
pressure indicator if a tire is
significantly underinflated or has
suddenly lost pressure. See
for what to
do if this indicator comes on.
347
11
428
Except LX models
Except Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Except Touring models
Security System Indicator Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate
Open Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Low
Tire Pressure Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
79
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８４
2009 Pilot
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page .
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
523
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
80
U.S. model is shown.
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGETACHOMETER
INFORMATION DISPLAYSELECT/RESET KNOB
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
SELECT/RESET KNOB
Touring models
Except Touring models
TACHOMETER
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８５
2009 Pilot
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, what you last selected is
displayed.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
For information about the multi-
information display, see page .
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
current fuel mileage, average fuel
mileage, range (estimated distance),
and maintenance item code(s).
85
On Touring models
Except Touring models
Odometer
Information Display
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
81
INFORMATION DISPLAY
TRIP METER A
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
ODOMETER
RANGE
ENGINE
OIL LIFE
CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE
AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE
TRIP METER B
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８６
2009 Pilot
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel mileage since you last
resetthattripmetercanbeshown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel mileage, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel mileage for that trip
meter also resets.
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
This display shows the current, or
instant fuel mileage you are getting.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
Current Fuel Mileage Average Fuel Mileage Range (Estimated Distance)
Gauges
82
０８／０３／１０ １７：３８：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８７
2009 Pilot
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, press and hold the select/
reset knob for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
Except LX models
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
Instruments and Controls
83
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８８
2009 Pilot
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
459
526
Gauges
Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message
84
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００８９
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
▲▼
To change the display, press the
INFO( / )buttononthesteering
wheel repeatedly until the main
menu appears (see page ).
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown in the next
page each time you press the INFO
( / ) button or SEL/RESET
button.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page ).
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display.
You can also change the display by
pressing the select/reset knob in the
instrument panel.
86
92
95
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
85
INFO ( / )
BUTTON
SEL/
RESET
BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９０
2009 Pilot
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
When the main menu is blank or
Trip Computer, pressing the SEL/
RESET button changes the display
to ‘‘odometer/trip meter’’ ‘‘outside
temperature/trip meter’’ and ‘‘engine
oil life.’’
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Trip MeterOdometer
Instruments and Controls
87
TRIP METER
ODOMETER
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９２
2009 Pilot
When you reset Trip A, AVERAGE
FUEL A, AVERAGE SPEED A, and
ELAPSED TIME A are reset at the
same time. When you reset Trip B,
AVERAGE FUEL B, AVERAGE
SPEED B, and ELAPSED TIME B
are reset.
You can customize the Trip A,
AVERAGE FUEL A, AVERAGE
SPEED A, and ELAPSED TIME A
reset condition on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Centigrade temperature in Canadian
models.
In the left corner of the lower
segment, a compass indicates which
direction your vehicle is pointed.
104
Multi-Information Display
Outside TemperatureCompass
88
U.S.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
Canada
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９３
2009 Pilot
Whenthetirepressuremonitoris
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page .
This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page .
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page ).
459
103
428
Tire Pressure MonitorEngine Oil Lif e
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
89
U.S.
Canada
ENGINE OIL LIFE
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９４
2009 Pilot
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system
without touching your cell phone.
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to the HFL and how
to receive or make phone calls, or
visit the handsfreelink.com website.
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Instantaneous fuel mileage
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
360
Multi-Information Display
Trip ComputerBluetooth HandsFreeLink
90
０８／０３／１０ １７：３９：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９５
2009 Pilot
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
forU.S.modelsorkilometersper
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
This shows the time passed traveled
since you last reset it. When you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.
You can customize the TRIP A INFO
(Trip A, AVERAGE FUEL A,
ELAPSED TIME A, and AVERAGE
SPEED A) reset condition in the
multi-information display (see page
).
This shows your current fuel
mileage.
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset the Trip A or
Trip B. 104
RANGE
AVERAGE SPEED A/B
ELAPSED TIME A/BINSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.
models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km
(Canadian models)
AVERAGE FUEL A/B
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
91
０８／０３／１０ １７：４０：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９６
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.
The message is shown until you
push the INFO ( or ) button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO ( or ) button, 5 seconds
after the display disappears.
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display:
Multi-Information Display
System Messages
92
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：４０：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ００９７
2009 Pilot
When the main menu displays
‘‘Keyless Memory Settings ,’’ you
can customize some vehicle control
settings.
To enter the customizing mode,
press the SEL/RESET button.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote transmitter
is linked to the system (see Keyless
Memory Settings on page ).
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page .
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
customize.
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in
Park.
151
98
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Customize Settings
Instruments and Controls
95
TM TM
０８／０３／１０ １７：４０：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１００
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−〜± 〜
−〜± 〜
＊
Menu Item Description Setting OptionGroup Setup Page
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A INFO RESET
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the language used in the display.
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel A, elapsed time A, and average speed
A.
Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror
positions to a stored setting.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
5°F 0°F 5°F
(U.S.)
3°C 0°C 3°C
(Canada)
with REFUEL
MANUAL ONLY
IGN OFF
ON
OFF
METER SETUP
(P.101)
POSITION SETUP
(P.106)
102
103
104
107
: Default setting
Multi-Information Display
96
０８／０３／１０ １７：４０：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０１
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Setting OptionDescriptionGroup Setup Menu Item Page
60 sec
30 sec
60 sec
30 sec
15 sec
MAX
HIGH
MID
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD
OFF
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR
ALL DOORS
ON
OFF
90 sec
60 sec
30 sec
SET
CANCEL
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
Changes the setting of when to automatically lock
the doors.
Changes the setting of when to automatically
unlock the driver’s/all the doors.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter in a first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.108)
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(P.113)
DEFAULT ALL
(P.98)
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT
AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
15 sec
0sec
LOW
MIN
109
110
111
114
115
117
118
119
98
: Default setting
SHIFT TO P
DRIVER DOOR /
ALL DOORS
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
97
０８／０３／１０ １７：４０：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０２
2009 Pilot
▲▼ ▲▼
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO ( / ) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
To set the default settings, press the
INFO ( / ) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
DEFAULT ALL
Multi-Information Display
98
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０３
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
▲▼
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
METER SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
POSITION SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shownonthenextpage.Pressthe
INFO( / )buttonuntilyousee
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO ( / ) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Customize Settings
Instruments and Controls
99
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０４
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
Here are the three custom settings
forthemetersetup:
TRIP A INFO RESET
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
Meter Setup
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
101
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０６
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Language Selection
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
102
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０７
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
CONTINUED
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
103
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
▲▼
▲▼
There are three settings you can
choose from:
with REFUEL Trip A Info is reset
every time you refuel your vehicle.
MANUAL ONLY You can reset
Trip A Info when you press and hold
the SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
IGN OFF Trip A Info is reset
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
Trip A Info Reset
Multi-Information Display
104
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１０９
2009 Pilot
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A INFO RESET’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
105
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１０
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Position Setup
Multi-Information Display
106
INFO button
SEL/RESET button
０８／０３／１０ １７：４１：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１１
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲
▼
Memory Position Link
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors move to the positions stored
in the memory when you open the
driver’s door, using the remote
transmitter.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘POSITION
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
107
０８／０３／１３ １０：３１：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１２
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
Lighting Setup
Multi-Information Display
108
INFO button
SEL/RESET
button
０８／０３／１０ １７：４２：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１３
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
CONTINUED
Interior Light Dimming Time
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and tailgate. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
109
０８／０３／１０ １７：４２：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１４
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
Headlight Auto Off Timer
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. To change how long
thelightsstayonbeforetheygooff,
follow these instructions:
Multi-Information Display
110
０８／０３／１０ １７：４２：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１５
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
▲
▼
CONTINUED
Auto Light Sensitivity
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.
MAX
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
bright.
HIGH
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
somewhat bright.
MID
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitisas
bright as sunset or sunrise.
LOW
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
somewhat dark.
MIN
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
dark.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
111
０８／０３／１０ １９：０８：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１６
2009 Pilot
▲▼
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
112
０８／０３／１０ １７：４２：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１７
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
CONTINUED
Here are the five custom settings for
the door/window setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Multi-Information Display
Door/Window Setup
Instruments and Controls
113
INFO button
SEL/RESET
button
０８／０３／１０ １７：４２：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
▲▼
▲▼
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
114
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１１９
2009 Pilot
▲▼
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Auto Door Unlock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
OFF The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
SHIFT TO P The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on your
selection in the next step, unlock
when you move the shift lever to
Park.
IGN OFF The driver’s door or all
the doors, depending on your
selection in the next step, unlock
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
115
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２０
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGN
OFF’’, you will see the above display.
Press the INFO ( / ) button to
switch the door lock mode setting
between the driver’s door and all
doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter your selection.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
116
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２１
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when
you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, follow these
instructions.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
117
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２２
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
arelockedandthesecuritysystem
has set (see page ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
347
Multi-Information Display
118
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２３
2009 Pilot
▲▼
Security Relock Timer
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
thetailgatewithin30seconds,the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
119
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２４
2009 Pilot
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
120
０８／０３／１０ １７：４３：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２５
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped
1:
2:
3:
4 : 4WD models only
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
121
HORN
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.169)
(P.143)
(P.162)
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
(P.131)
(P.399)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
MIRROR CONTROLS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
(P.171)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM
SWITCH
(P.124)
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.309)
(P.361)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.167)
(P.136)
(P.163)
(P.128)
(P.348)
(P.184)
(P.422)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.436)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.34)
VTM-4 LOCK
BUTTON
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
(P.85)
(P.122)
(P.390)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON
(P.128, 170)
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
4
3
3
3
０８／０４／１４ １８：１７：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２６
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
Ifyouturnittotheshortestdelay,
the wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
andholdit.Thewashersspray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
INT
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers
122
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２７
2009 Pilot
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
Ifyouattempttoopentheglass
hatch while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will return to
theparkedposition,andthenthe
glass hatch can be opened. After the
glass hatch is closed, the rear wiper
starts to operate again after a few
seconds delay.
To turn on the rear window wiper,
rotate the switch clockwise to ON.
It operates intermittently.
Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wipers activated, the rear
window wiper operates automatically.
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
The rear wiper will not work if the
glass hatch is not fully closed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
Instruments and Controls
123
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beamsstayonaslongasyouhold
the lever back.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
AUTO
Headlights on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off
Fog lights on
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
: If equipped
76
Turn Signal
Headlights On
High Beams
Turn Signals and Headlights
124
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１２９
2009 Pilot
− The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights, when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes
low (at dusk, for example). The
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. The lights and indicator
will turn off automatically when the
system senses high ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
thatyouturnonthelightsmanually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
.
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
weekormore).Youshouldalsoturn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.
The automatic lighting feature is
controlledbyasensorlocatedontop
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
111
On Touring models
Headlights
AUTO
Instruments and Controls
125
LIGHT SENSOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３０
2009 Pilot
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.
With the headlight switch off, the
daytime running lights come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parkingbrake.Theyremainonuntil
you turn the ignition switch off, even
if you set the parking brake.
When the headlights are on, the
daytime running lights are off.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.
Except LX models
On Touring models
Headlights
Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights
126
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３１
2009 Pilot
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the driver’s door.
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position).
The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
110
On Touring models
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Instruments and Controls
127
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３２
2009 Pilot
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
170
Except U.S. LX model
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
128
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３３
2009 Pilot
The select/reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
Separate adjustments can be made
when the headlights are on and off.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
The level of brightness is shown on
the information display while you
adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
CONTINUED
Except Touring models
Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
129
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４４：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３４
2009 Pilot
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
When the brightness reaches the
maximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESS
MAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on the
display.
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Brightness
130
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３５
2009 Pilot
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
131
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３６
2009 Pilot
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
boxlockedwhenyouleaveyour
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
Keys and Locks
132
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET KEY
(Light Gray)
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３７
2009 Pilot
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
133
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３８
2009 Pilot
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
134
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１３９
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
94
On Touring models
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Instruments and Controls
135
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４０
2009 Pilot
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all
the doors lock automatically.
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
.
To lock all doors and the tailgate,
push the top of the master door lock
switch on either front door, pull the
locktabrearwardonthedriver’s
door, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
Pushing the bottom of the either
master door lock switch will unlock
all doors and the tailgate. Pushing
forwardthelocktabonthedriver’s
doors unlocks only that door.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page .
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page .
117
114
115
On Touring models
Door Locks
136
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４１
2009 Pilot
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings
before you start driving.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page .
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page .
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park (P) position.
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
when the vehicle speed reaches
9mph(15km/h).
This is the default setting. 1.
2.114
115
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Except Touring models Except Touring models
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
137
０８／０３／１０ １７：４５：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４２
2009 Pilot
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position. 4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
To program the Park Lock mode:
Door Locks
138
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４３
2009 Pilot
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Except Touring models
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Auto Door Unlocking
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
139
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４４
2009 Pilot
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the shift lever is
moved into the Park (P) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To program the Park Unlock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Door Locks
140
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４５
2009 Pilot
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the ignition switch is
moved out of the ON (II) position.
all doors and tailgate
unlock feature
driver’s door unlock
feature.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of P.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
4.
5.1.
2.
3.
6.
3.
4.
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
141
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４６
2009 Pilot
With any door and the tailgate open
andthekeyintheignition,both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
thedoorsandthetailgateareclosed.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver’s door pops
out.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
fromtheinsideregardlessofthe
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
To open the tailgate, press and hold
the switch, then lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
it down, then press down on the back
edge.
Lockout Prevention
Childproof Door Locks Tailgate
Door Locks, Tailgate and Glass Hatch
142
Lock
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４７
2009 Pilot
The tailgate can be opened and
closed with the remote transmitter
(see page ) or the switch in the
driver’s door pocket when both front
doors are unlocked.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
If you push the same button or
switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.
Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter or the switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
If the glass hatch is opened, remote
transmitter operation is canceled
until it is closed.
59
149
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Power Tailgate
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Instruments and Controls
143
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４８
2009 Pilot
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the tailgate or
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
featurestopsworkingwhenthe
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
can pull the tailgate shut.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
or installing the fuse, close the
tailgate fully by hand.
The power tailgate may not open or
close under the these conditions:
The vehicle is parked on a steep
hill.
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
The power tailgate has an auto-
reverse feature. If it meets
resistance while opening or closing,
it will beep three times and reverse
direction. However, the tailgate may
not reverse immediately. Always
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.
The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
you press the button again while the
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.
Auto-Reverse
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
144
TAILGATE SWITCH
Closing a power tailgate while
anyone is in the path of the
tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear
before closing the power
tailgate.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４６：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１４９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
If you try to drive off with the
tailgate not closed completely, a
beeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message is
shown on the multi-information
display.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’
message on the multi-information
display. Have the system checked by
your dealer.
With this message shown on the
multi-information display, you can
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
When the tailgate or the roof is
covered with snow or ice.
Do not install any accessories on the
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
to function properly. If there is snow
or ice on the tailgate, make sure to
remove it before you operate the
tailgate.
The tailgate has sensors on both
sides. Be careful not to damage them.
If the sensors are damaged, the
power tailgate does not function
properly.
If you push the tailgate release
button inside the handle while the
tailgate is opening or closing, it will
stop moving. You need to open or
close it the rest of the way manually. If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate.
59
Unlocking the Tailgate
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Instruments and Controls
145
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５０
2009 Pilot
To open the glass hatch, press the
glass hatch release button on the
tailgate.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Ifyoucannotopenthetailgate,
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate (see page ). Make sure
the shift lever is in the Park (P)
position. Push the release lever to
the right as shown, then pull the
outer handle to open the tailgate.
To close the glass hatch, lower it and
press on the handle until it latches.
145
Except Touring modelsOn Touring models
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Glass Hatch
146
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５１
2009 Pilot
The rear wiper will not operate with
the glass hatch open. If you open the
glass hatch while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will return to its
parked position (see page ). The
wiper will resume operation after the
glass hatch is closed.
Keepthetailgateandtheglasshatch
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and the
glass hatch, and to prevent exhaust
gas from getting into the interior.
See on
page .
You can also open the glass hatch by
pressing the glass hatch release
button on the driver’s door or on the
remote transmitter.
123
59
Except Touring models
Tailgate and Glass Hatch
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Instruments and Controls
147
GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５２
2009 Pilot
−
−
Pressthisbuttononce
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
when you push the button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
.
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,
see page .
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash. When you
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
you will hear a beep to verify that the
doors and tailgate are locked and the
security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.
118
117
119
On Touring models
On Touring models
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCKRemote Transmitter
LOCK
148
Except Touring models On Touring models
UNLOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
TAILGATE
BUTTON
GLASS
HATCH
RELEASE
BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５３
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
If you push the same button again
while the tailgate is opening or
closing, three beeps sound, the
tailgate stops moving, reverses
direction and stops in the fully
opened or fully closed position.
Press and hold the
TAILGATE button to open or close
the power tailgate. When the tailgate
begins to move, you will hear a beep,
and some front and rear lights will
flash.
Press this button for about 1 second
to open the glass hatch. Even if the
glass hatch is open, the tailgate can
be locked with the remote
transmitter.
174
Except Touring models
On Touring models
Remote Transmitter
PANIC
TAILGATE
GLASS HATCH RELEASE
Remote Transmitter Care
Instruments and Controls
149
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５４
2009 Pilot
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
3.
1.
2.
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
150
BATTERY
SCREW
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５５
2009 Pilot
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
On Touring models
Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
Install the parts in reverse order.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1orDriver2)isshownontheback
of each remote.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter
Keyless Memory Settings
Instruments and Controls
151
TM
０８／０３／１０ １７：４７：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５６
2009 Pilot
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Except LX models
On EX-L and Touring models
Except EX-L and Touring models
1413
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.
The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
Here are the settings activated with
the remote;
Driving position memory
(see page ).
Customized settings
(see page ).
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
the power lumbar feature) and
outside mirrors start to move to the
positions stored in memory. The
indicator in the related memory
button to the remote comes on.
95
171
Front Seat Power Adjustments
Remote Transmitter, Seats
152
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５７
2009 Pilot
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Except EX-L and Touring models
13 14
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)
CONTINUED
Seats
FrontSeatManualAdjustments
Instruments and Controls
153
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５８
2009 Pilot
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
On LX models
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
154
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１５９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint.Donotattempttoadjustit
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
14
Seats
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Head Restraints
Instruments and Controls
155
RELEASE BUTTON
FRONT
SEAT-
BACK
LEGS
CUSHION
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６０
2009 Pilot
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
Seats
Active Head Restraints
Removing the Head Restraint
156
SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW
CUSHION
RELEASE BUTTONLEGS
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６１
2009 Pilot
To adjust the second row seats
forward and backward, pull up on the
bar under the front edge of the seat
cushion. Move the seat to the
desired position and release the bar.
Trytomovetheseattomakesureit
is locked in position.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
CONTINUED
Seats
Adjusting the Second Row Seats
Instruments and Controls
157
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６２
2009 Pilot
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle (see
page ) and allow the seat belt
to retract. Store the detachable
anchor and seat belt latch plates in
the retractor housing.
Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
Fold the seat-back forward.
To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on
thehandleontheoutsideoftheseat-
back, and push the seat-back.
2.
3.
4.
1.
160
Seats
Folding the Second Row Seats
158
HANDLE
０８／０３／１０ １７：４８：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６３
2009 Pilot
To get into the third row seats, pull
uptheleveronthesideofthe
passenger’s side second row seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and then can be slid forward.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page ).
Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
To fold the third row seat,
the second row seat-back must be
folded down or in the full up right
position.
Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure the outer shoulder belts
are positioned in each holding slot on
the side panel whenever the third
seat is folded.
1.
2.
3.
160
CONTINUED
Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
159
NOTE:
HANDLE
RELEASE LEVER
Third seat
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６４
2009 Pilot
When the seats are returned to the
upright position, these detachable
anchors should be latched back
properly.
The seat belts in the second row
center seat and the third row seats
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving. Reconnect the seat
belts to the detachable anchors.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).408
Detachable Anchor
Carrying Cargo
Seats
160
LATCH PLATE
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６５
2009 Pilot
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
Pull out the outer shoulder belts
from the holding slots. Both of the
third-row holding slots should only
be used when the seat belt is
detached.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
161
SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE
TRIANGLE
MARKS
SECOND ROW AND THIRD ROW
CENTER SEATS
SMALL LATCH PLATE
ANCHOR BUCKLE
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６６
2009 Pilot
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
The outer second row seat cushions
and seat-backs are equipped with
seat heaters. Turning the switch on
the driver side warms the outer seat
behind the driver’s seat only. The
passenger side switch warms the
outer seat behind the front
passenger seat.
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
On EX-L, Touring models, and Canadian
EX models
On Canadian Touring models
Seat Heaters
162
HI
Front seat
Second row seat
HEATERS
Passenger’s
Seat
Driver’s
Seat
LOW
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６７
2009 Pilot
−
CONTINUED
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switchdownandholdit.Releasethe
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
AUTO
Power Windows
Seat Heaters, Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
163
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６８
2009 Pilot
− If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
If either front
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passengers’
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in
whenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
1.
2.
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
164
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１６９
2009 Pilot
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
To open:
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows
and moonroof start to open. To
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof (if equipped) from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
You can open and close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) with
the key in the driver’s door lock.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.1.
CONTINUED
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
165
０８／０３／１０ １７：４９：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７０
2009 Pilot
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
the moonroof switch lightly and hold
it. The moonroof will stop when you
release the switch.
To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
Auto reverse does not work when
closing the windows and moonroof
with the key.
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.
4.
On EX-L and Touring models
Moonroof
Power Windows, Moonroof
166
MOONROOF SWITCH
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７１
2009 Pilot
− You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page ).
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
for details.
69
165
CONTINUED
Parking BrakeAUTO REVERSE
Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
Moonroof, Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
167
RELEASE HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７２
2009 Pilot
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Theinsidemirrorcanautomatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
93
On LX and EX models
On Touring models
On EX-L and Touring models
Mirrors
Parking Brake, Mirrors
168
AUTO BUTTON
INDICATOR
SENSOR
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７３
2009 Pilot
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
When you shift to reverse with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, the rear view is shown on
the left side of the inside mirror. For
more information, see page .
1.
2.
3.
4.
395
On EX-L models
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
169
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and affect its
performance.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７４
2009 Pilot
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its original
position.
171
On Touring models
Except U.S. LX model
Mirrors
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror Heated Mirrors
170
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７５
2009 Pilot
Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page ).
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Two seat and outside mirror
positionscanbestoredinseparate
memories. You select a memorized
position by pushing the appropriate
button or using the appropriate
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or
Driver 2).
You can change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting on the
multi-information display (see page
). Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page ).
Press and release the SET button
on the control panel. You will hear
a beep. Immediately press and
hold one of the memory buttons (1
or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
1.
2.
3.
4.
152
169
107
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
171
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７６
2009 Pilot
Not press a memory button within
5 seconds.
Doing any of the following after
pressing the SET button will cancel
the storing procedure.
Pressing the SET button again
within 5 seconds.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
Readjust the seat position.
To select a memorized position, do
this:
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
1.
2.
Driving Position Memory System
Selecting a Memorized Position
172
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７７
2009 Pilot
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
Press any button on the control
panel: SET, 1, or 2.
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
173
０８／０３／１０ １７：５０：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７８
2009 Pilot
The light control switch has three
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and
ON.
The individual map lights come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
the lens.
The cargo area light comes on
whenthetailgateisopenedifthe
light control switch is in the door
activated (center) position. When
thetailgateisclosed,thecargo
arealightcanbeturnedonwith
the switch in the light.
The individual door lights will
operate when a door is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
When the switch is in the door activated
position:
When the switch is in the OFF position:
Light Control Switch
Interior Lights
174
OFF
ON
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１７９
2009 Pilot
When the light control switch is in the
position:
On Touring models
ON
After all doors are closed tightly, the
lights dim slightly, then fade out in
about 30 seconds.
Turn on the front row individual map
lights by pushing the lens. Push the
lens again to turn it off. With the
light control switch in the door
activated position, the second row
and third row map lights can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
.
The lights also come on when the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
Withanydoororthetailgateleft
open, the lights stay on about 15
minutes, then go out.
All the individual map lights come on
andstayonaslongastheswitch
remains in the ON position.
109
CONTINUED
Individual Map Lights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
175
FRONT
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８０
2009 Pilot
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page ).
The courtesy lights in all four doors
come on when you open any door.
The light around the ignition switch
only come on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light stays
on for several seconds.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
.
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, the light comes on
when you open the tailgate or the
glass hatch. In the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
129
109
On Touring models
Individual Interior LightsCargo Area Light
Interior Lights
176
ON
OFF
COURTESY LIGHT
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８１
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊ : If equipped
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
177
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
GROCERY HOOK
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CONVERSATION MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
INTEGRATED SUNSHADE
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
COAT HOOKS
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
GLOVE BOX
０８／０４／１４ １８：１８：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８２
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle has a multi-function
center console. It includes beverage
holders, storage compartments, an
armrest, a coin holder, and a storage
tray. To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
To open the front of the console
compartment, squeeze the knob, and
push it forward. To close, squeeze
the knob and slide the cover
backward.
To open the rear of the console
compartment, pull up on the lever
and lift the armrest.
Interior Convenience Items
Center Console
Console Compartments
178
LEVER
CONSOLE FRONT COMPARTMENT
CONSOLE REAR COMPARTMENT
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
There is a removable partition in the
main compartment area. The
partition can be used to divide the
forward compartment from the
beverage holder area, or can be
stored to the rear of the beverage
area to create a deeper storage tray.
The console front compartment has
a removable coin holder. Pull the
coin holder straight up to remove it.
To install it, push it down along the
guides on the side of the
compartment.
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Coin Holder
Instruments and Controls
179
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８４
2009 Pilot
To open the compartment, pull the
lever and lift the lid. To close, lower
the lid and push it down until it
latches.
The center seat-back in the second is
equippedwithanarmrestthat
provides the beverage holder. Pivot
down the seat-back to use them.
To open the beverage holder,
squeeze the knob, and slide the
cover forward.
Interior Convenience Items
Storage Compartment
180
BEVERAGE HOLDER
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８５
2009 Pilot
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
Each rear door has an integrated
sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, and pull the
sunshade all the way up. Insert the
holes on the sunshade into the hooks
on the window frame.
Open the glove box by pulling up on
thehandle.Closeitwithafirmpush.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses HolderIntegrated SunshadesGlove Box
Instruments and Controls
181
TAB
HOOK
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
Push
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５１：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８６
2009 Pilot
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
On EX-L and Touring models
Interior Convenience Items
Sun VisorConversation Mirror
182
Slide
SUN VISOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８７
2009 Pilot
These hooks are not designed for
large or heavy items.
Touseacoathook,slideitout
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
Tousethevanitymirrorontheback
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
Interior Convenience Items
Coat HooksVanity Mirror
Instruments and Controls
183
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８８
2009 Pilot
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Your vehicle has a seat under tray
located under the front passenger
seat. Use the tray by pulling on the
front center edge of the tray.
Your vehicle has four accessory
power sockets. These are located on
the instrument panel, in the console
compartment, back of the center
console box, or behind the third row
seat on the passenger’s side.
On Touring models
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power SocketsSeat Under Tray
184
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１８９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
inside the front console
compartment. To use the AC power
outlet, open the lids and open the
outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system and on Touring models
Interior Convenience Items
AC Power Outlet
Instruments and Controls
185
REAR
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９０
2009 Pilot
The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet. The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.
The cargo net will separate the
storage area into two storage areas.
On the upper area, you can store
small and light items. You should
place heavy items in the lower
storage area. You can remove the
cargo net and store it under the
cargo floor to make a larger cargo
area.
Interior Convenience Items
Cargo Hooks Cargo Net
186
NOTE:
HOOK
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９１
2009 Pilot
Make sure to use the cargo net
securely hooked.
The maximum load on the cargo net
is 22 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kg
on Canadian models. This is shown
on a label back of the cargo area
floor (see page ). To prevent
damage to the cargo net, do not
exceed the maximum load.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
When any of the third row seats are
folded down, do not place any
objects on the cargo net. Make sure
to store the cargo net under the
cargo area floor. It could be
unlatched during a crash.
188
408
Interior Convenience Items
Carrying Cargo
Instruments and Controls
187
Do not use this cargo net if the
third row seats are folded down.
Objects placed on the cargo net
could be thrown forward during
a crash or sudden stop and hurt
someone.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９２
2009 Pilot
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 22 lbs (10 kg) on this
cargo net.
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 10 kg on this cargo net.
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
Interior Convenience Items
188
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９３
2009 Pilot
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Theclimatecontrolsystemandthe
audio system have a voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system manual for more information.
..............Vents, Heating and A/C . 190
.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 195
...............Climate Control System . 197
..............Rear Climate Controls . 202
................................Audio System . 206
..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 208
................................Playing a Disc . 216
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 223
................................Audio System . 224
..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 225
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 234
.................................Playing Discs . 240
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 249
................................Audio System . 250
..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 251
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 264
.................................Playing Discs . 272
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 282
..................Protecting Your Discs . 283
............................PlayinganiPod
. 286
.................iPod
Error Messages . 295
Playing a USB Flash Memory
........................................Device . 296
USB Flash Memory Device Error
...................................Messages . 305
............FM/AM Radio Reception . 306
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 308
................Remote Audio Controls . 309
.................Radio Theft Protection . 311
..........................Setting the Clock . 312
........Rear Entertainment System . 315
............................Security System . 347
...............................Cruise Control . 348
.........................................Compass . 351
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 355
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 360
................Parking Sensor System . 390
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 394
LX models
EX and EX-L models without
navigation system
Models with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Except LX models
Features
Features
189
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：５１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９４
2009 Pilot
Vents, Heating, and A/C
190
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
LX models
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL
BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
OFF BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
MAX A/C BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
０８／０３／１０ １７：５２：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９５
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
CONTINUED
Press the button to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Temperature Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button
Features
191
０８／０３／１０ １７：５３：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９６
2009 Pilot
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select , the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
When you switch to from
, the A/C stays on, and you
canturnitonandoffmanually.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
/
128
Except U.S. LX model
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Mode Control
Rear Window Defogger
Button
192
０８／０３／１０ １７：５３：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９７
2009 Pilot
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red mark,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. You will see A/C ON in
the display.
Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
80
CONTINUED
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the A/CVentilation Using the Heater
Features
193
０８／０３／１０ １７：５３：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９８
2009 Pilot
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Switch the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select / to help
clear the rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C turns off. But
if it was on to start with, it stays on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
5.
If the interior is very warm,
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Dehumidify the Interior
194
０８／０３／１０ １７：５３：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０１９９
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
The rear passengers can adjust the
fan speed, temperature, and airflow
of the rear A/C unit with the rear
control panel. Press the temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Turn Everything Off
Using the Rear A/C Unit
Rear Control Panel
Temperature Control
Features
195
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
OFF BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：５３：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２００
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
Press the fan control button
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
Press the button to
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.
When is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
When is selected, air flows
from the lower vents.
To shut off the rear A/C unit, press
the OFF button until the system
shuts off.
To turn on the rear A/C unit,
increase the fan speed and airflow.
Fan Control Mode Control
Vents, Heating, and A/C
196
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０１
2009 Pilot
Climate Control System
FRONT CONTROL PANEL
REAR CONTROL PANEL
Except LX models
Features
197
AUTO BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
MODE
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL BUTTON
RR (REAR) LOCK BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０２
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
Press the Auto button on the front
control panel.
Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control buttons.
You will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
You can set the driver’s side
temperature, the passenger’s side
temperature, and the temperature
of the rear passenger
compartment separately.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
The driver’s side temperature, the
passenger’s side temperature and
the rear passenger compartment
temperature can be set separately.
Press the button of the
appropriate temperature control to
increase the temperature of airflow.
Press the button to decrease it.
Each set temperature is shown in the
display. The rear temperature is
showninthedisplayonthebackof
the center console.
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
1.
2.
3.
On vehicles with navigation system
Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System
Temperature Control
Climate Control System
198
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０３
2009 Pilot
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
In the Auto mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver, front passenger, and rear
passengers according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
basedontheinformationofthesun
light sensor and the sun position
which is updated automatically by
the navigation’s global positioning
system (GPS). For example, if the
driver’s side of the vehicle getting
too much sun, the system will adjust
to a lower temperature.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the temperature
of the rear passenger compartment
is synchronized to the driver’s side
set temperature. You will see SYNC
on the system display of the rear
control panel. Changing the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment takes the system out
of synchronized mode. This causes
thewordSYNCinthedisplaytogo
out and displays the rear
temperature in the front display.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and see LOCK
on the system display of the front
and rear control panels, the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment is not synchronized to
the driver’s side set temperature.
On vehicles with navigation system RR (Rear) Lock Button
Climate Control System
Features
199
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０４
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Press the button to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Semi-automatic OperationTo Turn Everything Off
Fan Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
Climate Control System
200
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０５
2009 Pilot
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the front passenger’s
temperature cannot be set separately
from the driver’s.
128
Windshield Defroster Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
Climate Control System
Features
201
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０６
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
When this button is on, you will see
LOCK on the system display. The
rear climate controls can only be
controlled by the front control panel.
Press the temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
Rear Climate Controls
RR (Rear) Lock Button Temperature Control
Climate Control System
202
MODE BUTTONRR LOCK BUTTON
REAR CONTROL PANEL
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL
BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １７：５４：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０７
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
▲▼
Press the fan control button
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
Press the button to
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.
Each time you press the mode
button, the mode display changes
from to .
When is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
When is selected, air flows
from the lower vents.
Pressing the AUTO button puts the
system in automatic operation mode.
The rear system automatically
adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment. You will see AUTO in
the display.
To shut off the rear climate control
system, press the OFF button until
the system shuts off.
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side are
controlled independently.
When the RR (REAR) LOCK button
is off, the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment can be
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, press
either of the temperature control
buttons ( or ) on the climate
control panel.
Climate Control System
Fan Control
Mode Control
Automatic Operation
Triple Zone Temperature Control
Features
203
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０８
2009 Pilot
When you set each temperature to
its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
Climate Control System
204
Rear Passenger Compartment
Passenger’s SideDriver’s Side
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２０９
2009 Pilot
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Climate Control System
Features
205
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１０
2009 Pilot
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
For vehicles with rear entertainment
system, see pages through .
For LX models, see pages
through .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages through .
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages through .
208 223
224 249
250 305
315 346
Audio System
206
LX models
EX and EX-L models without rear
entertainment system
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１１
2009 Pilot
Audio System
Features
207
Touring models without rear entertainment system Touring models with rear entertainment system
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
either of the SKIP buttons ( or
), then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
211
CONTINUED
To Select a StationTo Play the FM/AM Radio
TUNE
SKIP
SCAN
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Features
209
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１４
2009 Pilot
−−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Pick a preset button (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Usethetune,skip,scan,orRDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Press the A. SEL button. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
306
To turn off auto select
AUTO SELECTPreset
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
210
０８／０３／１０ １７：５５：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１５
2009 Pilot
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’
CONTINUED
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Features
211
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１６
2009 Pilot
−＋
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
Press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category. The
displayshowstheselectedRDS
category name for a few seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk, foreign language, personality,
public, college, and weather
JAZZ: Jazz
CLASSIC: Classical music
RELIGION: Religious music and
religious talk
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side of the FOLDER bar ( or )
to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either of the SKIP
buttons ( or ). You will see
the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 10 seconds.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search
212
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１７
2009 Pilot
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
RDS Program SCAN
Features
213
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed-
sensitive volume compensation)
settings.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Except SVC adjustment
Adjusting the Sound SVC
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
214
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２１９
2009 Pilot
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
129
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Audio System Lighting
Features
215
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２０
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD button until you hear a
beep.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
CONTINUED
To Play a Disc
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
217
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
showninthedisplay.Whenplayinga
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text data on a disc, if the disc was
recorded with text data.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
283
Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc
Playing a Disc (LX model)
218
０８／０３／１０ １７：５６：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２３
2009 Pilot
−
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3/
WMA mode).
Each time you press and
release the SKIP button, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or SKIP
button.
The display shows up to about 14
characters of selected text data (the
foldername,filename,etc.).Ifthe
text data has more than 14
characters, you will see the first 14
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 14
characters are shown.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
219
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２４
2009 Pilot
−−
＋
−
−
−
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
Each time you press and release the
RPTsideofthebar,themode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal playing.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,
presstheRDMsideofthebar
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM side of
the bar for 2 seconds to return to
normal play.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the FOLDER bar. Press the
side of the bar to skip to the next
folder, and the side of the bar to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT side of
theRPT/RDMbar.YouwillseeRPT
in the display. Press and hold the
RPTsidefor2secondstoturnitoff.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT side of the
RPT/RDM bar twice. You will see
F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT side of the bar
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM side of the bar, or selecting a
different folder with the FOLDER
bar also turns off the repeat feature.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER-REPEAT
Playing a Disc (LX model)
220
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２５
2009 Pilot
−−
−
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
also turns off the scan feature.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
button, also turns off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal playing.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
presstheRDMsideoftheRPT/
RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in the
display. The system will then select
and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM side of the bar again, or by
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar.
Each time you press and release the
RDMsideofthebar,themode
changes from folder random play to
random play (within a disc random
play), then to normal playing.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button until you hear a beep
to get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOM
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
221
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２６
2009 Pilot
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc player.
283
Protecting Discs
To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing a Disc (LX model)
222
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２７
2009 Pilot
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
SolutionError Message
284
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 284). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)
Features
223
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２８
2009 Pilot
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector (ENTER) to go to that
selection.
When the audio system is in XM
satellite radio mode or playing discs,
pushing the selector (ENTER) knob
switches the display between the
normal display and the extended
display. The extended display has
three segments to display the
detailed information.
Pressing the MENU button again
will also cancel the menu display
mode.
To select any setting such as the
clock, sound adjusting, or the
compass, press the MENU button.
To use any audio system function,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can select the item by turning
the selector knob. To go back to the
previous display, press the RETURN
button.
Selector Knob Menu Display
Audio System (EX and EX-L models)
224
SELECTOR
KNOB
MENU
BUTTON
RETURN
BUTTON
Without rear entertainment system
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２２９
2009 Pilot
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
Features
225
SELECTOR KNOB
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON
EX models without rear entertainment system
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３０
2009 Pilot
−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume
by turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button, or AM/FM button. On
the FM band, ST will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
.
The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the or side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
228
To Select a StationTo Play the Radio SKIP
TUNE
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
226
０８／０３／１０ １７：５７：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３１
2009 Pilot
−
−−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,skip,scan,orRDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On vehicles without rear entertainment
system
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
AUTO SELECT
PresetSCAN
Features
227
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３２
2009 Pilot
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.306
To turn off auto select
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
228
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３３
2009 Pilot
−＋
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side ( or ) of the CATEGORY
bar to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Religious music and
religious talk
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk, foreign language, personality,
public, college, and weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar to select an RDS category. The
displayshowstheselectedRDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
Features
229
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３４
2009 Pilot
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
( or ) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 10 seconds.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
RDS Program SCANRDS Program Search
230
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３５
2009 Pilot
＊＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
Press the MENU button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer),
CENTER , Dolby PL (Prologic) II ,
and SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
(ENTER) knob to enter the setting,
then turn the selector knob to adjust
the setting.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.
To return to the normal playing,
push the RETURN or MENU button
after you stop adjusting a mode.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the bass.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
: If equipped
If equipped Except SVC adjustment
Adjusting the Sound SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SVC
BALANCE
FADER
TREBLE
BASS
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
Features
231
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３６
2009 Pilot
−
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
be activated when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
andAUX.WhenProLogicIIisactive,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
If equipped
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
232
０９／０２／１３ １４：４５：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３７
2009 Pilot
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
129
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)
Audio System Lighting
Features
233
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３８
2009 Pilot
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
234
PRESET BUTTONS
SELECTOR KNOB
XM RADIO
BUTTON
EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system
XM RADIO
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SELECTOR KNOB
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
PRESET BUTTONS
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
０８／０３／１０ １７：５８：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２３９
2009 Pilot
−
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Radio anywhere in the United
States, and Canada, except Hawaii
and Alaska. XM
is a registered
trademark of XM Satellite Radio
,
Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes in
the following sequence: name, title,
and category.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Operating the XM Satellite Radio
MODE
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
Features
235
０９／０２／１３ １４：４５：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４０
2009 Pilot
−−＋−−Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
You can also select a channel or
category from the list by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
TUNE CATEGORY ( or ) SCAN
236
０８／０３／１０ １７：５９：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４１
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Use the selector knob,
CATEGORY bar, or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again. The
other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
Thepresetsmaybelostifyour
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
3.
4.
5.
2.
1.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
Preset XM Satellite Radio Display
Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
Features
237
０８／０３／１０ １７：５９：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
238
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
０８／０３／１０ １７：５９：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４３
2009 Pilot
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM
Satellite Radio reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
, or call 1-877-438-
9677. You will need to give them
your radio I.D. number and your
credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Satellite Radio mode while you
wait for activation. This should take
about 30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
the display, and you’ll be able to
listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)
Features
239
０８／０３／１０ １７：５９：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４４
2009 Pilot
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
240
DISC SLOT
DISC LOAD
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC SLOT
DISC LOAD
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY
BAR
U.S. model is shown.
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
EX-L models with rear entertainment system
SELECTOR KNOB
SELECTOR KNOB
０８／０４／１４ １８：１８：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４５
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. The disc, folder and track
numbers are displayed. You can
select up to 255 folders or tracks.
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX or CD button. You will see
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and
track numbers, and the elapsed time
areshowninthedisplay.Youcan
also select the displayed information
with the TITLE button (see page
). The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
The specifications for
compatible MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/
22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD/AUX or CD button until
you hear a beep.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
243
CONTINUED
To Play a Disc
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
Features
241
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／０３／１０ １７：５９：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４６
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holdsuptosixdiscs.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.
When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Sampling frequency:
22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
To load more than one disc, press
the LOAD button until you hear a
beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the
display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Loading Discs
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
242
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４７
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text data on a disc, if the disc was
recorded with text data.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to about 32 characters of the text
data.
IfyoupressandholdtheTITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
Text Data Display Function
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
Features
243
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４８
2009 Pilot
−
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page ).
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
CATEGORY bar to select folders in
the disc and use either side of the
SKIP bar to change files.
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSKIPbar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
releasethe sideofthebarto
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
select a folder or track/file from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob (ENTER) to
switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
242
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
SKIP
244
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２４９
2009 Pilot
−−
−
−
−＋
＋
−
−
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, select the disc
random play from the menu items.
You will see RANDOM in the display.
Selectthenormalplaymodeto
return to normal play.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, select the folder repeat mode
from the menu items. You will see F-
REPEAT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Select the normal play mode
to turn it off. Selecting a different
folder with the CATEGORY bar also
turns off repeat feature.
This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To active disc repeat, select the disc
repeat mode from the menu items.
You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select the normal play mode
to turn it off.
To
select a different folder, press either
side ( or ) of the CATEGORY
bar. Press the side to skip to the
next folder, and press the side to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), select the
track repeat mode from the menu
items. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Select the normal play mode
to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)FOLDER REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (Track Repeat)
Features
245
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５０
2009 Pilot
−−
−
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are recorded. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
file in the main folders for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,
or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the CATEGORY bar) turns off the
SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within the current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3
or WMA. To activate folder random
play, select the folder random mode
from the menu items. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
selecting the normal play mode, or
you select a different folder with the
CATEGORY bar.
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button until you hear a beep
to get out of scan mode and play the
last track sampled.
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCANFOLDER RANDOM
SCAN
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
246
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５１
2009 Pilot
−
CONTINUED
This feature, when
activated, samples the first track in
each disc in order (the first file in
themainfolderoneachdiscinMP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
D-SCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder in the first
disc for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then play
the following first track/file for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
playing.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal playing.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or selecting a different folder with
the CATEGORY bar also turns off
the scan feature.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM, FM, AM/FM,
or XM (if equipped) button. Press
the CD (CD/AUX on models with
XM satellite radio) button again to
switch back to the disc changer.
In MP3 or WMA mode
D-SCAN To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
Features
247
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５２
2009 Pilot
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM).
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
283
Protecting Discs
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)
248
０８／０３／１０ １８：００：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５３
2009 Pilot
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause SolutionError Message
284
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 284). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Changer Error Messages (EX and EX-L models)
Features
249
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０８／０４／１４ １８：１８：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５４
2009 Pilot
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER)togotothatselection.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
On models with navigation system
Interface Dial Voice Control System
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
250
SELECTOR
KNOB
ENTER
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５５
2009 Pilot
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
251
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO DISPLAY
PRESET BUTTONS
With rear entertainment systemWithout rear entertainment system
INTERFACE DIAL
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
AUDIO
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
AUDIO
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
A.SEL (AUTO
SELECT) BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５６
2009 Pilot
− Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the selector
down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
Then press ENTER on the selector,
andturntheknobtothedesired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob, the AM, or FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM or FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
audio display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
TUNE
To Play the FM/AM Radio
To Select a Station
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
252
STEREO ICON
TUNE ICON
BAND
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５７
2009 Pilot
−
− To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan button again, or push
the interface selector to the right
again.
The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
The SKIP (SEEK)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar or button,
then release it. You can also activate
the SKIP function (SEEK is
displayed on the screen) by pushing
the interface selector to the right or
left.
CONTINUED
SCAN
SKIP (SEEK)
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
253
SCAN ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５８
2009 Pilot
−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twosetsofFMfrequencieswith
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To turn off auto select, press
ENTER on the interface selector or
press the A.SEL button again. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds.
You can also press the A.SEL button.
YouwillseeA.SELonthescreen,
and the system goes into scan mode
for several seconds. The system
stores the frequencies of six AM and
twelve FM stations in the preset
buttons.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To store a preset memory location:
On vehicles without rear entertainment
system
AUTO SELECT
Preset
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
254
A.SEL ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２５９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message on
the center display. If the station you
are listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
306
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Features
255
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６０
2009 Pilot
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the selector on
the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows;
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency with the PS
name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘PS NAME
OFF.’’
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk, foreign language, personality,
public, college, and weather
JAZZ: Jazz
CLASSIC: Classical music
RELIGION: Religious music and
religious talk
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
COUNTRY: Country music
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
ALL: All RDS category stations
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
256
RDS SEARCH ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０１：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６１
2009 Pilot
−＋
CONTINUED
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
Turn the selector to select an RDS
category. You can use search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category by pressing
the selector to the right repeatedly.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
If you do nothing while the RDS
category is selected, the selected
category is cancelled.
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
( or ) of the SKIP bar or
button. You will also see the selected
RDS category name blinking in the
center display while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 10 seconds
in the center display.
You can also select an RDS category
with the CATEGORY bar. Press
either side ( or ) of the
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
category in the center display. Select
a category by pressing either side of
the bar.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Program Search
Features
257
RDS CATEGORY
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６２
2009 Pilot
To activate RDS program search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the selector down, and turn the
knob to select RDS SEARCH icon.
Press ENTER on the selector. The
screen shows you the RDS category
list.
Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SEEK in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the seek function.
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Program SCAN
258
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
SEEK ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６３
2009 Pilot
Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
To activate RDS program scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SCAN in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the scan function.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station. You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
CONTINUED
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
259
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
SEEK ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６４
2009 Pilot
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
The display shows up to about 64
characters of text data on the
selected RDS station.
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the selector
down, and turn the knob to select the
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.
Radio Text Display
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
260
The text is displayed
accordingtothe
information from RDS.
RADIO TEXT ICON
TEXT INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６５
2009 Pilot
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
Selectthemodeyouwanttoadjust
by turning the interface dial.
You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the audio display as it changes. Turn
the TUNE knob to adjust the setting
to your liking.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Theseadjustmentscanbemadeby
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.
CONTINUED
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
261
SOUND ICON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６６
2009 Pilot
−− −To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector. The current setting is
shownonthedisplay.Turnthe
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
262
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６７
2009 Pilot
− Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
be activated when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
andAUX.WhenProLogicIIisactive,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
To change the SVC mode, select
SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
263
０９／０２／１３ １４：４５：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６８
2009 Pilot
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
264
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO DISPLAY
PRESET BUTTONS
With rear entertainment systemWithout rear entertainment system
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
AUDIO
BUTTON
XM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
XM
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２６９
2009 Pilot
To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
Push the AUDIO button to display
XM information on the screen. You
can operate the XM Satellite Radio
system with the interface dial.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM
is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections
in the audio display.
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
Features
265
０８／０３／１０ １８：０２：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７０
2009 Pilot
−− In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Onthescreen,youwillseethe
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to choose TUNE and press
ENTERontheselector.Turnthe
interface knob to the same directions.
In the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.
To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen. To switch
the mode with the interface dial,
push down the interface selector to
select AUDIO MENU, then turn the
knob to select MODE, and press
ENTER on the selector repeatedly.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
TUNEMODE
266
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７１
2009 Pilot
−−
−＋
CONTINUED
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
scan with the interface dial, scroll
down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen and audio display.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again
or press the SCAN button to cancel.
Press either side of
the bar ( or ) to select another
category.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
SCANCATEGORY
Features
267
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７２
2009 Pilot
− Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
Use the tune or scan function to
tune to a desired channel.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
Press the button or scroll
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Preset
268
XM BAND
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７３
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or
isnotpartofyour
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
CONTINUED
XM Satellite Radio Display
Messages
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
269
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７４
2009 Pilot
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
270
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７５
2009 Pilot
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM Canada at , or at
1-877-438-9677. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Satellite Radio mode while you
wait for activation. This should take
about 30 minutes.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM
Satellite Radio reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
the display, and you’ll be able to
listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
CONTINUED
Receiving XM Satellite Radio
Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
271
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７６
2009 Pilot
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
272
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO DISPLAY
PRESET BUTTONS
With rear entertainment systemWithout rear entertainment system
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
TUNE KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
SKIP BUTTONS
LOAD
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
LOAD
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０３：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７７
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position.
The disc changer can play these disc
formats:
When playing a disc in MP3, you will
see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page ).
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system displays UNSUPPORTED in
the center display, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs will not
work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW
MP3/WMA
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD/AUX or CD button until
you hear a beep.
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
278
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
273
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７８
2009 Pilot
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position, press and hold the LOAD
button until you hear a beep and
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,
then release the button.
‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
foranemptypositioninthe
changer. When the green load
indicator comes on and you see
the ‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,
insert the disc into the slot. Insert
it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.
Press and release the LOAD
button.
To load a single disc:
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system will
then begin playing the last disc
loaded.
Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it
only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way. You
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in audio display.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage
the audio unit.
You can select the position to load a
disc. Turn the interface knob or
press a preset button to select the
position, then press ENTER on the
selector. This starts the loading
sequence. If you do not select the
position, the system loads the disc to
the first empty position in numerical
order.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
audio display again, insert the next
disc into the slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Loading Discs in the Changer
274
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２７９
2009 Pilot
When you play CD-TEXT, you will
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will
see the track name and folder name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,
and WMA formats.
Select the changer by pressing the
CD or CD/AUX button. The system
will begin playing the last selected
disc in the disc changer. You will see
the current disc position highlighted.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the center display changes
from album name, to track name, to
artist name, and then to normal
display that shows the track number
and the elapsed time. When playing
a disc in MP3/WMA, the display
mode changes from folder name, to
file name, to artist tag, to album tag,
to track tag, and then to normal
display.
If the disc does not carry album,
track, or artist name, pressing the
TITLE button shows ‘‘NO INFO.’’
Each time you press and release the
side of the SKIP bar, button, or
push the interface selector to the
right, the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side of the
SKIP bar, button, or push the
interface selector to the left to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press the side or
push the interface selector to the left
againtoskiptotheprevioustrack.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdeithersideoftheSKIPbar
or button.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To Change Tracks
Features
275
CURRENT DISC
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８０
2009 Pilot
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
When you press the SCAN button or
scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the next track of
the current track plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
TRACKonthescreenandaudio
display. To listen to the rest of the
track, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep or push
the interface selector to the left
again within 10 seconds.
When you press the SCAN button
repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in
the audio display, or push down the
interface selector to the right, the
first track of the current disc plays
for about 10 seconds. You will see
SCAN next to DISC on the screen
and D-SCAN in the audio display. To
listen to the rest of the disc, press
andholdtheSCANbuttonuntilyou
hear a beep, or push down the
interface selector to the right again
within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of its first track, and continues
through the rest of the discs the
same way. When the system reaches
the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
and that disc continues to play.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Choose a Track
Track Scan
Disc Scan
276
CURRENT TRACK
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８１
2009 Pilot
To replay the current track
continuously, press and release the
RPT button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. As a
reminder, you will see REPEAT next
toTRACKonthescreenandRPTin
the audio display. To turn this
feature off, press and hold the RPT
button until you hear a beep, or
highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
To replay the current disc
continuously, press the RPT button
repeatedly until you see D-RPT in
the audio display, or use the
interface selector to scroll down,
select DISC REPEAT, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see REPEAT
next to DISC on the screen and
D-RPT in the audio display. To turn
this feature off, press and hold the
RPT button until you hear a beep, or
highlight DISC REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
To play the tracks of the current disc
in random order, press and release
the RDM button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK RANDOM, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see RANDOM
next to TRACK on the screen and
RDM in the audio display. To turn
this feature off, press and hold the
RDM button until you hear a beep,
or highlight TRACK RANDOM (if
not already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play
Features
277
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM or FM button, the
button, AUX button, or CD/
AUX button. To return to disc mode,
press the CD button or CD/AUX
button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
The CD changer can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWscompressedinMP3and
WMA format. When playing a disc in
MP3 or WMA, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or
‘‘WMA’’ on the center display. A disc
can support more than 99 folders,
and each folder can hold up to 255
playable files.
When there are more than 99 folders
in a disc, the center display only
shows two digits.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/
22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Sampling frequency:
22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
disc controls previously described,
along with the following information.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a Disc Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
278
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８３
2009 Pilot
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the files and folders
within a disc. While playing a MP3/
WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.
The currently playing folder and file
information comes on the screen.
Push the selector to show the folder
list. Turn the selector knob,
highlight the folder you want to see
the information within, and press
ENTER.
While playing an MP3/WMA disc,
you can select a folder within the
disc by pressing either side of the
category bar. Each time you press
either side of the bar, the folder title
and its first file’s information appear
in the center display in recorded
order.
CONTINUED
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Folders
Features
279
MP3/WMA INDICATOR CURRENT FOLDER
０８／０３／１０ １８：０４：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８４
2009 Pilot
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN button repeatedly
until you see F-SCAN in the audio
display. You will see SCAN next to
FOLDERandF-SCANintheaudio
display.
To listen to the rest of the folder,
press and hold the SCAN button
until you hear a beep. If you do not,
the system advances to the next
folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and
continues throughout the rest of the
folder same way. When the system
samples the first file of all folders,
folder scan is canceled, and the last
file played comes back.
You can see the list of all the files in
the selected folder. Turn the selector
knob, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
If the main folder has some
additional folders in the lower layer,
you can also see each lower folder
listedonthescreen.
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder. To
activate folder repeat mode, press
the RPT button repeatedly until you
seeF-RPTintheaudiodisplay,or
use the interface selector to scroll
down, select FOLDER REPEAT by
interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. You will see
REPEAT next to FOLDER on the
screen and F-RPT in the audio
display. To turn this feature off,
press and hold the PRT button until
you hear a beep, or highlight
FOLDER REPEAT (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Folder RepeatFolder Scan
280
CURRENT TRACK
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８５
2009 Pilot
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitbypressing
the corresponding number on the
preset button or turning the
interface knob, and pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
This feature, when activated, plays in
the current folder in random order.
To activate folder random play, press
the RDM button; or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
FOLDER RANDOM by interface
knob, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
screen and F-RDM in the audio
display. To turn this feature off,
press and hold the RDM button until
you hear a beep, or highlight
FOLDER RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc. If you do not load another disc,
the load sequence is canceled, and
the system continues playing in the
previous mode.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Removing Discs from the
Changer
Folder Random
Features
281
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８６
2009 Pilot
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause SolutionError Message
284
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 284). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Changer Error Messages
282
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８７
2009 Pilot
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythedisc
changer.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-
shaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
283
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８８
2009 Pilot
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
1.
2. 3.
Protecting Your Discs
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
284
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
Using Printer
Label Kit
Warped BurrsChipped/
Cracked
With Label/
Sticker
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２８９
2009 Pilot
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo. For the
rear entertainment system, see
page .
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-
disc
.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
4. 5.
342
Protecting Your Discs
Features
285
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９０
2009 Pilot
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
286
CATEGORY BAR
USB ICON
iPod ICON
MAP/GUIDE BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
CENTER DISPLAY
SKIP BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
CD/AUX BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０５：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９１
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
This audio system can operate the
audio files on the iPod
with the
same controls used for the in-dash
disc changer. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
AUX button. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. The iPod will also
be recharged with the ignition switch
in these positions.
The audio system reads and plays
sound files to be playable on the iPod.
The system cannot operate an iPod
as a mass storage device. The
system will only play songs stored on
the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
theplaymodefunctions.
iPods that are compatible with your
audio system are listed below.
Use the latest firmware.
UseonlycompatibleiPodswiththe
latest firmware. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
:
Model
iPod 5G
iPod classic
iPod nano
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod touch
iPhone
Firmware
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
CONTINUED
To Play an iPod
Voice Control System
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
287
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９２
2009 Pilot
Do not connect your iPod using a
HUB.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, the
audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
DonotkeeptheiPodinthe
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
1.
Connecting an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
288
NOTE:
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９３
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.
When the iPod is connected and the
iPod mode is selected on the audio
system, the iPod indicator is shown
in the center display. If you selected
the audio control display by pressing
the AUDIO button, you will see the
iPod and USB icons on the screen.
After loading, you will see the Honda
mark on the iPod. That means you
can only operate your iPod using the
vehicle’s audio unit.
Itmaytakeafewminutesfor
the Honda mark to display on
the iPod. If the display does not
change, this function is not
supported on your iPod model
or firmware.
2.
3.
:
www.apple.com/
ipod.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
289
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
DOCK CONNECTOR
Sample Display
OK to disconnect.
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９４
2009 Pilot
−
You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector to the right side to
skip forward and to the left side to
skip backward.
You can also select a file from any of
the iPod menus: playlists, artists,
albums and songs, by using the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to display the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push up the interface selector to
display the iPod menu. Turn the
knob on the interface dial to select a
desired list.
Use the SKIP bar or button while an
iPod is playing to select passages and
change files.
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSKIPbar
or button, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next file.
Press and release the side of
the bar or button, to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SKIP bar or button.
To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
290
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９５
2009 Pilot
Push ENTER on the selector to
display the items on that list, then
turn the knob on the interface dial to
select a desired list. Pushing the
selector up or down moves a
selection to the top or bottom of the
screen items. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the
artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode on the audio menu.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then push
down the selector to display the
audio menu. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select an audio
mode: repeat, album random, and
track random. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
PresstheAUDIObuttontogoback
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio control display on
the screen.
CONTINUED
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
291
Push down the selector.
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９６
2009 Pilot
−
−To cancel the selected mode, press
ENTER again while the highlighted
mode is selected on the audio control
display.
This feature
continuously plays a file.
To turn it off, press ENTER again.
This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. You will see
TRACK RANDOM on the screen.
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER
again.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or button changes the file while
keeping the repeat feature.
REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
292
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９７
2009 Pilot
−
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER again.
You can also select another list from
theiPodmenuwhilekeepingthe
random function.
Available operating function varies
on models or versions. Some
functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
This feature
plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. You will see ALBUM
RANDOM on the screen.
To play the radio, press the AM, FM,
or XM button. Press the CD or CD/
AUX button to switch to the disc
mode (if a disc is loaded).
CONTINUED
To Stop Playing Your iPod
ALBUM RANDOM
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
293
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９８
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
Disconnect’’ message in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to Disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
NO DATA.
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page .
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
:
295
Disconnecting an iPod
iPod Error Messages
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
294
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０２９９
2009 Pilot
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
SolutionError Message
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There
is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
Features
295
FILE ERROR
MEDIA ERROR
０８／０３／１０ １８：０６：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３００
2009 Pilot
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
296
With rear entertainment system
INTERFACE DIAL
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
CENTER DISPLAY
AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY
USB INDICATOR
CATEGORY BAR
MAP/GUIDE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０１
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
This audio system can operate the
audio files on a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc changer. To play
a USB flash memory device, connect
it to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
AUX button. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
Do not keep the USB flash
memory device in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possibletoplaysomefiles,or
display some text data.
You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
theplaymodefunctions.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 Mbyte or
higher USB flash memory devices.
Some digital audio players may be
compatible as well.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
Some USB flash memory device
(such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a HUB.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
:
CONTINUED
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
Voice Control System
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
297
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
Partition:
Top partition only
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Maximum layers: 8
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
Partition:
Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48 320 kbps
Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
Partition:
Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
AAC format, a file with unsupported
version cannot be played. If the
system finds it, the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
298
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０３
2009 Pilot
When the USB device is connected
andtheUSBmodeisselectedonthe
audio system, the USB indicator is
showninthecenterdisplay.Italso
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the folder and file names, and the
elapsed time in the navigation screen.
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
2.1.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
299
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０４
2009 Pilot
−
−
＋
−
You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector knob to the right
to skip to the beginning to the next
file,andtothelefttoskiptothe
beginning of the current file.
Pushing it to the left again skips to
the beginning of the previous file.
Use the SKIP bar or button while a
USB flash memory device is playing
to select passages and change files.
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSKIPbar
or button, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next file.
Press and release the side of
the bar or button, to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SKIP bar or button.
To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the side to skip to the next
folder, and press the side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
To Change or Select Files
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
Folder Selection
300
SKIP
DIRECTION
SKIP
DIRECTION
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０５
2009 Pilot
Push up the selector on the interface
dial to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the knob on the
interface dial to select a folder.
Press ENTER to change the display
to the file list, then turn the knob on
the interface dial to select a file.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
You can also select a folder or file
fromthelistbyusingtheinterface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio control display on the
navigation screen.
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio mode display.
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
301
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０６
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes on the audio
menu screen. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push down the selector on the
interface dial to display the audio
menu items.
Turntheknobontheinterfacedial
to select a play mode: folder random,
track random, folder repeat, track
repeat. Press ENTER to set your
selection.
To cancel the selected mode, push
down the selector to display the
audio menu on the audio control
display. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select the
highlighted play mode, then press
ENTER to turn off that selected
mode.
This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar also turns off this
feature.
This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order.
This feature
plays all the files in random order.
This feature
continuously plays a file. Pressing
either side of the SKIP bar or button
also turns off this feature.
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
FOLDER REPEAT
FOLDER RANDOM
TRACK RANDOM
TRACK REPEAT
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
302
０８／０３／１０ １８：０７：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０７
2009 Pilot
−−
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel.
Press and release the SCAN button.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan mode and play
the last file sampled.
You can also select the folder scan
feature with the SCAN button on the
control panel. Press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the folder scan mode and
play the last file sampled.
This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, push
the selector to the right. You will see
TRACK SCAN on the screen. You
will also see SCAN on the center
display and the file number blinking.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file in the folder. Push the
selector to the right repeatedly to get
out of the scan mode. The system
plays the last file sampled.
This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature, push
the selector to the right repeatedly.
You will see FOLDER SCAN on the
screen. You will also see SCAN on
the center display and the folder
number blinking. You will get a 10
second sampling of each first file in
the folder(s). Push the selector to
the right to get out of the scan mode.
The system plays the last file
sampled.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY or SKIP bar or button
also turns off the feature.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK SCAN FOLDER SCAN
Features
303
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０８
2009 Pilot
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device of any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page .
To play the radio, press the AM, FM,
or XM button. Press the CD or CD/
AUX button to switch to the disc
mode (if a disc is loaded).
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
305
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
304
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３０９
2009 Pilot
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
damaged.
Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
Features
305
FILE ERROR
MEDIA ERROR
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１０
2009 Pilot
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
FM/AM Radio Reception
306
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１１
2009 Pilot
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FM/AM Radio Reception
Features
307
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１２
2009 Pilot
For more information, see page .
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
The auxiliary input jack is inside the
front console compartment. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
or CD/AUX button to select it.
345
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
Auxiliary Input Jack
308
Touring model is shown
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１３
2009 Pilot
▲▼
＋
−
＋−
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
CONTINUED
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1, XM2 (if equipped), CD (if a
disc is loaded), DVD video (if
equipped), USB (if a USB memory
device is connected), AUX-Audio or
AUX-Video (if equipped).
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for
1 second.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
To go to the next disc, press the top
( ) of the button for 1 second.
Press the bottom ( ) for 1 second
to go back to the previous disc.
When you play an MP3/WMA disc,
press the top ( ) of the button for 1
second to go to the next folder. Press
the bottom ( ) for 1 second to go
back to the previous folder.
Except LX models
Remote Audio Controls
Features
309
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１４
2009 Pilot
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
If you are listening to XM Satellite
Radio, use the CH button to change
channels. Each time you press the
top ( ) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset channel.
Pressthebottom( )togobackto
the previous preset channel.
To go to the next channel of the
category you are listening to, press
the top ( ) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
IfyouareplayingaDVDvideo,use
the channel button to change
chapters. Each time you press the
top ( ) of the button, the system
goes to the next chapter. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press it again to return to the
previous chapter.
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
Remote Audio Controls
310
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１５
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’intheaudio
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. The code is
locatedontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
Radio Theft Protection
Features
311
０８／０３／１０ １８：０８：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１６
2009 Pilot
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock.
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
Except Touring models
On Touring models
Setting the Clock
312
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
CLOCK
BUTTON
EX and EX-L models
RESET
BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
HOUR
BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
MINUTE
BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
SELECTOR KNOB
MENU BUTTON
EX-L model with rear
entertainment system is shown.
LX models
CLOCK BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１７
2009 Pilot
△
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’
Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display changes to the clock
adjusting display.
Turn the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Turning the selector knob will
change the selected item between
the clock display setting, hours,
minutes, and SET. The selected
item is indicated with in the
display.
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between 24-
hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
Press and release the MENU
button. The display shows you the
menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
On EX and EX-L models
Setting the Clock
Adjusting the Clock with MENU
Button
Features
313
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１８
2009 Pilot
To set the time, turn the selector
knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
enter your selection. The display
changes to the setting display.
Turn the selector knob up or down
to count the numbers up or down.
Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
While setting the clock, pressing
the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button again
will cancel this setting mode.
Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H.
Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
To enter the clock setting, turn
the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
display.
Press either the RETURN or
MENUbuttontogobacktothe
normal display.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Setting the Clock
314
MINUTE SETTING
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３１９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Pressing the REAR CTRL OFF
button disables rear control. The
indicator in the button comes on and
your passengers can no longer
operate the system with the rear
control panel. When the button is
pressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ message
appears in the overhead screen to let
your passengers know that the
control panel is disabled.
The rear system selects the source it
waslastsetto.Ifthatsourcehas
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You should select another
source or insert a DVD.Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (radio, disc
changer, DVD player, XM Radio, or
optional CD changer/tape player)
than the front seat occupants. The
audio is broadcast through the
supplied wireless headphones.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
Whenyouturnonthesystem,the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
audio display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the wireless
headphones.
Ifyouwanttoturntherearspeakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until the Rear Speakers
Off icon goes off.
The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
Press the REAR PWR button. The
indicator on the REAR PWR button
will come on. The rear seat
passengers can then operate the rear
system from the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can
also be detached and used as a
remote control, by pushing the
RELEASE button, and pulling the
remote toward you.
On vehicles with rear entertainment
system
To Turn On the System
Rear Speakers
Rear Entertainment System
Features
315
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２０
2009 Pilot
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with navigation system
316
Overhead Screen Unit
FRONT SOURCE
BUTTON
REAR PWR
BUTTON
REAR CTRL OFF
BUTTON
REAR SOURCE
BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２１
2009 Pilot
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will
hear two beeps and the indicator in
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
The media that the rear passengers
are listening to will then be heard
from the front speakers.
If you do not operate the rear
entertainment system from the front
panel within 10 seconds, the
indicator goes off and the FRONT
SOURCE indicator comes on
automatically.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
If discs are loaded in the disc
changer of the upper part, select the
CD/AUX button. If a disc is loaded
in the lower player, select the DVD
button.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs, audio CDs, video CDs,
MP3/WMA discs and DTS CDs.
CONTINUED
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
Features
317
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２２
2009 Pilot
−
−
Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
Press the button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
Press the button to
pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
When the DVD menu is displayed,
‘‘DVD MENU’’ and ‘‘Push to
start’’ appears. Press button to
play the DVD.
Rear Entertainment System
PLAY
PAUSE
On vehicles with navigation system
318
PLAY/PAUSE
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
EJECT BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：０９：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２３
2009 Pilot
−− Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, press the
FRONT SOURCE button. You will
hear a beep and the indicator in the
button comes on. The indicator also
comes on automatically when you do
not operate the rear entertainment
system for 10 seconds.
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the PWR button. Use the AM/
FM button, XM RADIO button, CD
button, or DVD/AUX button to
select the entertainment source. The
selected source will be shown in the
display. Make sure the rear control
operation has not been disabled with
the REAR CTRL button on the front
panel. When the audio system is off
or the front side rear power is off,
the rear control panel cannot be
turned on.
Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
forward; you will see the time
elapsed shown in the overhead
screen advances rapidly. Press and
hold the side of the SKIP bar to
move backward; you will see the
time elapsed shown in the overhead
screen decreases. Release the bar
when the system reaches the point
you want.
Each time you press the side of
the SKIP bar and release it, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the SKIP bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
EJECT
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
Using the Rear Control PanelSEEK/SKIP
Rear Entertainment System
Features
319
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２４
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Usethe,,,or
button to highlight SEEK,
TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, or
one of the preset radio stations on
the overhead screen. You can enter
the highlighted function by pressing
the ENT button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can also
use the or buttons to seek
up/down and or to tune
up/down.
You can also use the or
buttons to change categories
up/down and or to change
channels up/down within a category
(in CATEGORY mode) or up/down
for all channels (in CH mode).
Usethe,,,or
button to highlight CATE (to
change categories), CHAN (to
change channels), MODE (to
change category or channel mode),
SCAN, or one of the preset channels
on the overhead screen. You can
enter the highlighted function by
pressing the ENT button. These
functions have the same features as
those of the front audio system.
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
320
REAR CONTROL PANEL
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２５
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲
▲
▼
▼
▼▲
▲▼
While the overhead screen is closed,
you can see the XM radio
information in the subsidiary display
in the ceiling. Pressing the DISP
MODE button repeatedly changes
the subsidiary display from the
channel number, to the category
name, to the music title, to the artist
name, and to the channel name, and
then back to the channel number.
To change mode, press and hold the
DISP MODE button for 5 seconds.
Usethe,,,or
button to highlight REPEAT,
RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),
, or (cue) on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENT button. These functions have
the same features as those of the
front audio system.
If discs are loaded in the disc
changer, select them by pressing the
CD button.
To change the disc currently playing,
usethe,,,or
button to highlight your
selected disc icon, and press ENT.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the or button changes
the discs.
If an iPod
or USB flash memory
device is connected to the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment, you can select files to
play.
For an iPod
,usethe , ,
, or button to highlight
REPEAT, RANDOM, ,
(skip), , or (cue) on
the overhead screen.
For a USB flash memory device, use
the,,,or
button to highlight REPEAT,
RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),
, or (cue) on the overhead
screen.
Rear Entertainment System
To Play a Disc in the 6-Disc
Changer from the Rear Control
Panel
To Play an iPod
or USB Flash
Memory Device from the Rear
Control Panel
Features
321
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２６
2009 Pilot
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
Press the button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the button to
move forward, or the button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
ToselectthemenuontheDVD,
press the MENU/SCROLL button.
Usethe,,,and
buttons to move to the desired
menu selection, then press the ENT
button to enter your selection.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
322
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN
BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２７
2009 Pilot
When you press the MENU
SCROLL button while a DVD is
playing, the DVD Menu appears.
ThemenuoptionsareTOPMENU,
MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH,
and NumInput.
To go to your selected menu, use the
or button to highlight the
icon and press the ENT button. To
return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, the
screen changes to the DVD’s title
menu. This menu also appears when
you press the MENU SCROLL
button while a DVD is not playing.
To go back to play, press the
RETURN button.
Top Menu
When you press the DISP MODE
button while a DVD is playing, the
current status of title, chapter,
elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio,
and sound characteristics, with the
personal surround logo are displayed.
To return to the DVD video screen,
press the DISP MODE button again.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
MENU SCROLL ButtonDISP MODE Button
Features
323
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２８
2009 Pilot
▲
▼
Menu Play Mode
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the
or button, the screen
changes to the DVD’s title menu.
When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’
with the or button, you
can change the DVD’s Audio,
Subtitle or Angle setting.
To change the Audio setting,
highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
mode menu with the or
button. A submenu of dubbed
languages appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.
‘‘Audio’’
Rear Entertainment System
324
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３２９
2009 Pilot
▼▲
▼
▲
▼▲
CONTINUED
‘‘Subtitle’’
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
notbeavailableonsomeDVDs.
Press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the or button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu. Press the RETURN button
again to exit completely.
After selecting your desired subtitle,
press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the or button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu. Press the RETURN button
again to exit completely.
To change the DVD’s subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the or
button. You can see the
available subtitles with the or
button.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
325
０８／０３／１０ １８：１０：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３０
2009 Pilot
▼▲
▲▼
‘‘Angle’’
When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ with
the or button, the ‘‘Jump
to chapter and title number input’’
message appears. To select
‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, press
the ENT button.
SearchIf there are no multiple angles
available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1’’.
Press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the or button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu.
Press the RETURN button again to
exit completely.
To change the view angle, highlight
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu
with the or button. You
can see the available angle options
with the or button.
Rear Entertainment System
326
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３１
2009 Pilot
▲▼
CONTINUED
‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the
or buttontojumptoyour
desired title and press the ENT
button. When ‘‘Chapter’’ is
highlighted, follow the same
procedure for the chapter search.
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Select the first digit number using
the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.
When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’
with the or button, the
‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.
PresstheENTbuttontogotothe
NumInput selection screen.
Num Input
Rear Entertainment System
Features
327
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３２
2009 Pilot
▼▲
Select and enter the second digit
number the same way. The cursor
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
icon when you press the ENT button.
Press the ENT button to enter the
number command. To go back to the
DVD screen, press the RETURN
button or select EXIT and press the
ENT button.
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
DISP ADUSTMENT, ASPECT
RATIO, and PERSONAL
SURROUND.
To change a setup, use the or
button to highlight your
selection and press the ENT button.
To return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.
To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
the or button and press
the ENT button. You can adjust
these display settings:
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Tint
Color
Disp Adjust
Rear Entertainment System
SETUP Button
328
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３３
2009 Pilot
▼▲
▲▼
CONTINUED
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the or button.
Adjust the setting by pressing the
or button. When you are
finished with your adjustment,
cursor back to the top of the setup
menu, or press the RETURN button
to exit.
The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the or button, then
press the ENT button.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
329
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３４
2009 Pilot
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the or button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Select the desired setting by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
Aspect Ratio
Rear Entertainment System
330
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３５
2009 Pilot
▲▼
CONTINUED
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the or button and
press the ENT button. The effect
selection appears.
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the or button,
and enter your selection by pressing
the ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
Personal Surround
Rear Entertainment System
Features
331
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３６
2009 Pilot
▼▲
When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the or button, the menu
shown above appears.
There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’
Menu Language
To return to the stop or prestop
screen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the
or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
Language’’ by pressing the or
button.
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Rear Entertainment System
332
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３７
2009 Pilot
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
showninthenextcolumn.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai,
Japanese or others.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
333
０８／０３／１０ １８：１１：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３８
2009 Pilot
▼▲
Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number digit
usingthe,,,or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When the
fourth digit is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
display with the , , ,
or button, and press the ENT
buttononthecontrolpanel.Then
select and enter the correct number
digit as described. The display
returns to the initial ‘‘Language’’
menu screen.
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the or button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
Rear Entertainment System
334
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３３９
2009 Pilot
▼▲
Subtitle Language
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by
pressing the or button. You will
see the submenu next to the
‘‘Subtitle Language.’’
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the top
of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,
the above menu appears on the
screen.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)
Rear Entertainment System
Features
335
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４０
2009 Pilot
▼▲ ▼▲
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the or
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
Angle Mark
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the or button.
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
or button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or button.
Rear Entertainment System
336
ANGLE MARK
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４１
2009 Pilot
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
the display changes as shown above.
To change the level, you need to
enter your four digit password.
Select the number for the first digit
by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and press
ENT button. You will see the
submenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ and
press the ENT button, the screen
goes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Parental Level
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
337
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４２
2009 Pilot
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.
If you enter the password correctly,
you can then change the parental
control level.
The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
when the vehicle left the factory.
Changing the Password
Rear Entertainment System
338
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４３
2009 Pilot
To change the password, select
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Select the first digit by pressing the
, , , or button,
and enter it by pressing the ENT
button. Repeat this until all four
digits are entered. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
password setting steps until you
enter the correct password.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
339
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４４
2009 Pilot
▲
If you forget the password, select
‘‘Password,’’ and press the button
10 times.
The display changes as shown above.
If you want to use the default
password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
press the ENT button.
The message ‘‘Default password
setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
Rear Entertainment System
Remote Control
340
RELEASE BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：５１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４５
2009 Pilot
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
Battery type: BR3032
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Rear Entertainment System
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
Features
341
COVER
０８／０３／１０ １８：１２：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４６
2009 Pilot
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot be
played in this system.
The DVD player can also play discs
recorded in MP3/WMA formats and
DTS CDs.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision.
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .
Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
283
Playable DVDs
Protecting DVDs
Rear Entertainment System
342
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４７
2009 Pilot
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
SolutionCauseError Message
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
system.
Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental
control level (see page 337).
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Invalid region code
Invalid parental
control level
Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
Features
343
CHECK DISC
MECH ERROR
HEAT ERROR
REGION ERR
PARENTAL CHECK
０８／０４／１４ １８：１８：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４８
2009 Pilot
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocketofeitherfrontseat,orthe
rear door lining pockets.
Wireless Headphones
Rear Entertainment System
344
VOLUME DIAL
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３４９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way. An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Rear Entertainment System
Replacing Batteries
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Features
345
COVER
BATTERY
TAB
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５０
2009 Pilot
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
V=Videojack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
Rear Entertainment System
346
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
VOLUME DIALS
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５１
2009 Pilot
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, the hood, the tailgate, and the
glass hatch. For the system to
activate, you must lock the doors,
thetailgateandtheglasshatchfrom
the outside with the key, driver’s
lock tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an alarming system before the
two minutes have elapsed, unlock
the driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, the
glass hatch, or the hood without
using the key or the remote
transmitter will cause the alarm to
sound. It will also sound if the radio
is removed from the dashboard or
the wiring is cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, the tailgate, the glass
hatch, or any door is not fully closed.
If the system will not set, check that
thedoors,thetailgateandthehood
are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Except LX models
Security System
Features
347
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５２
2009 Pilot
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Thecruisecontrolsystemcanbe
lefton,evenwhenitisnotinuse.
1.
2.
3.Using Cruise Control
Cruise Control
348
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５３
2009 Pilot
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
CONTINUED
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
349
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１３：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５４
2009 Pilot
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
thesamespeedasbefore.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Cruise Control
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
350
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５５
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compassseemstobecontinually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
If the compass display is blinking
and the CAL indicator is shown, the
compassisself-calibrating.
Press and hold the RPT button
and TUNE/SOUND knob for
about 2 seconds until you hear a
beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
1.
2.
Except Touring models
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models
Compass
Compass Calibration
Compass Operation
Features
351
COMPASS
COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
０８／０４／１４ １８：２０：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５６
2009 Pilot
Turn the selector or TUNE/
SOUND knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’
Press the selector or TUNE/
SOUND knob to enter your
selection. The display shows you
‘‘PUSH CAL START.’’
While setting the compass,
pressing the RETURN button (on
EX and EX-L models) will go back
to the previous display. Pressing
the MENU button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
Press the selector or TUNE/
SOUND knob. The compass
display is blinking and the CAL
indicator is shown.
Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compasssystemiscalibrating,the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
5.
6.
4.3.
Compass
352
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５７
2009 Pilot
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector or TUNE/SOUND knob
to cycle the zone lists up or down.
Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
Press and hold the RPT button
and TUNE/SOUND knob for
about 2 seconds until you hear a
beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
Turn the selector or TUNE/
SOUND knob to select ‘‘ZONE.’’
Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display shows
you the currently selected zone
number.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button(onEXandEX-Lmodels)
to return to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button will
cancel the compass setting mode.
Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector or TUNE/
SOUND knob. The display then
returns to normal.
4.
1.
2.
3.
354
5.
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models
Compass
Compass Zone Selection
Features
353
ZONE NUMBER
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５８
2009 Pilot
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compasssystemisinthezone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
Compass
354
Zone Map
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３５９
2009 Pilot
×
The HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
CONTINUED
Except LX models
General Safety Information
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
355
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６０
2009 Pilot
−
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote transmitter 1 to 3
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
ofthewayofthedevicetoprevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
Todothis,pressandholdthetwo
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
1.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Important Safety Precautions Training HomeLink
Before you begin
356
RED INDICATOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：１４：５１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 4.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 3.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 4.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 1 thru 3.
Test the HomeLink button by
pushing it for about 1 second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button and watch the red indicator
on HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on, press
the HomeLink button again; the
remotely controlled device
should operate.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
2. 3. 4.
5.
358
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
357
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６２
2009 Pilot
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.). Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
6.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code
System
358
TRAINING BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６３
2009 Pilot
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
1.
2.
356
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
www.homelink.com.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
359
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６４
2009 Pilot
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
UsingVoiceControlonpage .
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page .
Bluetooth
is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL.
TheHFLusesaClass2Bluetooth,
which means the maximum range
between your phone and vehicle is
30 feet (10 meters).
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL).
HFL uses Bluetooth
technology to
link your cellphone to your vehicle.
With HFL, you can place and receive
calls through your vehicle’s audio
system, without the distraction of
handling your cellphone. To use this
feature, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cellphone with the Hands
Free Profile. For more information,
and a list of compatible cellphones,
visit , or call
(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
, or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
The HFL is available in both English
and French (Canadian models only).
To change the language, see page
. To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
along with the Hands Free Profile.
This type of phone is available
through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
, or by calling
the Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,
visit , or call (888)
9-
HONDA-9.
The Bluetooth
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
With a linked phone, the HFL allows
you to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its phonebook.
Withalinkedphone,youcanthen
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
102
372
364
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.
honda.ca
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.honda.ca
On Touring models
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Voice Control
Bluetooth
Wireless Technology
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
Phonebook
360
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６５
2009 Pilot
To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFLTalk:Thisbuttonisusedbefore
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, between the front map lights
and the console buttons. On models
with navigation system, the
microphone is shared with the
navigation system.
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, the HFL over-rides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob,
or the steering wheel volume
controls.
Your vehicle’s HFL system has the
cellular phonebook import function.
This allows you to import your
cellular phonebook to the HFL.
Using the navigation system, you can
makeacalldirectlyandstorea
desired number in the HFL from the
list shown on the navigation display.
For more information on how to
import the phonebook or to make a
call, see page .
You can also store the desired
number to the HFL directly from
your mobile phone using the receive
contact function in the HFL.
372
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
HFL ButtonsMicrophone
Audio System
Features
361
HFL TALK BUTTON
HFL BACK BUTTON
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６６
2009 Pilot
Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.
HFLBack:Thisbuttonisusedto
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.
When you are dialing or receiving
calls with the audio system in use,
you will see the HFL screen on the
navigation display.
You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREE
LINK’’ on the center display.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on
the center display if your phone is
linked to the Bluetooth compatible
cell phone.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Information Display
362
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６７
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
When you are operating the HFL, or
when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you
will see this information on the
screen:
Signal Strength Indicates the
network signal strength of the
current phone. Five bars equals
full strength.
ROAM Status Indicates your
phone is roaming.
Battery Level Status Indicates
the power currently remaining in
your phone’s battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.
HFL Mode Indicates when you
are dialing and receiving calls.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Multi-Information Display
Features
363
SIGNAL
STRENGTH
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
HFL
MODE
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
０８／０３／１０ １８：１５：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６８
2009 Pilot
−
＊
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
To enter a command, press and
release the Talk button. Then,
after the beep, say your command
in a clear, natural tone.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
TheHFLisoperatedbytheHFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
basic features of the HFL.
Phone Dialing Indicates the
number you entered or the
number of the incoming call.
Some phones do not send this
information to the HFL.
:
Using Voice ControlHow to Use the HFL
All phones may not
operate identically, and some
may cause inconsistent
operation of the HFL.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
364
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３６９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
When voice commands are used,
the fan speed will be automatically
adjusted to low. However, for
better voice recognition, lowering
the fan speed may be necessary.
Adjust the airflow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
After pressing the Talk button,
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command.
Give a voice command in a clear
natural speaking voice without
pausing between words or
numbers. If the system cannot
recognize your command because
of the background noise, speak
louder.
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
If the HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command a second time, its
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
doesn’t recognize the command a
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
365
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７０
2009 Pilot
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial
123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, and 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while the HFL is
speaking. The HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.
To go back one step in a command
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the Back button.
If nothing is said while the HFL is
listening for a command, the HFL
will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins from its main menu.
When you finish a command
sequence, the HFL goes back to
its main menu. For example, when
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
stored.’’ The next time you press
the Talk button, you will be at the
main menu.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
free help.’’
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
366
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７１
2009 Pilot
ThevoiceoftheHFLcanbesetto
male or female (U.S. models only).
Also, the incoming notification can
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
male or female prompts?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
the notification to be a ring tone or
prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the
beep, the HFL returns to its main
menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no
ring tone or prompt playback
during an incoming call. The audio
system will still mute, and a
message will be displayed.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or
‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘A
ring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘An
incoming call prompt will be used.’’
If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will
hear a ring tone through the audio
speakers to announce an incoming
call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
will hear this message to
announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
have an incoming call.’’
The HFL response continues ‘‘A
security option is available to lock
the HFL system. Each time the
vehicle is turned on, a passcode
would be required to use this
system. Would you like this
security option turned on?’’ If you
say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.
4.
5.3.
2.
1.
6.
To set up the system, do this:
Setting Up the System
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
367
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７２
2009 Pilot
The HFL will accept a numeric, four-
digit passcode that you can use for
security purposes.
Follow the system setup
procedure as described previously.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
four-digit number you would like
to set as your passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
passcode you want to use. For
example,say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthis
correct?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not
be used. The system setup is
complete.’’
Once a passcode is set, you can lock
the HFL so it only operates after the
passcode is entered.
The HFL will prompt you for your
passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
thepasscodeonceperignition
cycle. If the passcode is set, its
response is ‘‘The system is locked.
What is the four-digit passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four-digit
passcode.Forexample,say‘‘1,2,3,
4.’’
If you forget your passcode and you
cannot activate the HFL, consult
your dealer to cancel the passcode.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Security is on.
Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to
use the system. The system setup
is complete. Returning to the main
menu.’’
If the passcode is correct, the HFL
response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
passcode is not correct, the HFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4isincorrect.
Pleasetryagain.’’Gobacktostep
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
To set your passcode, do this:
To enter your passcode, do this;
Setting Your Passcode
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
368
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Phone setup options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
process requires operation of your
mobile phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. State a four-
digit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the
phone.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFLresponse
is,‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthiscorrect?’’
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its Discovery mode.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
Your Bluetooth
compatible phone
with Hands Free Profile must be
paired to the HFL before you can
make and receive hands-free calls.
To confirm that your phone is
Bluetooth
compatible, visit
, or call (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888)
9-
HONDA-9. Your phone retailer
should also be able to confirm that
your phone is Bluetooth
compatible.
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit
,callthe
Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
your phone retailer. In Canada,
call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone. 3.
1.
2.
handsfreelink.honda.com
handsfreelink.honda.com
Pairing Your Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
369
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７４
2009 Pilot
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘HFL is now
searching for a Bluetooth phone.
Make sure the phone you are
trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’
Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the
phone’s operating manual.
Follow the prompts on your phone
togetitintoitsDiscoverymode.
The phone will search for the HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
If you want to pair another phone,
repeat steps 1 through 7.
When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone. The HFL response is
‘‘A new phone has been found.
What would you like to name this
phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
new name for Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
1.
2.6.
7.
8.
3.
4.
4.
5.
To rename a paired phone, do this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
370
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１６：５２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７５
2009 Pilot
To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:
To list all paired phones, do this:
To delete a paired phone, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
strength is three bars. Signal
strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
deleted.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
to delete Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
delete Eric’s phone. Say OK to
continue, otherwise, say Go back,
or Cancel.’’
2.
1.
2.
1.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
371
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：０２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７６
2009 Pilot
To end the call, press the Back
button.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
continue to add numbers.’’
You can also make a call directly
from the list shown on the
navigation display.
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
theHFLallowsyoutotalkupto30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch. Continuing
a call without running the engine
may discharge and weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
for the next phone.’’ The HFL
then disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone. If the HFL finds it, an
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’ If no
other phones are found, the first
phone remains linked.
1.
2.
4.
3.
1.
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:
On Touring models
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Making a Call
372
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７７
2009 Pilot
＃
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
To send a number during a call, do this:
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
To end the call, press the Back
button.
The HFL allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system. You can also
program account numbers into the
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval
during menu-driven calls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3.’’TheHFLresponseis
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
To redial the last number called by
the phone, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
4. Sending Numbers or Names
During a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
373
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７８
2009 Pilot
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Would you like to
send account number?’’
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
If your phone has Call Waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
During a call, you can transfer it
from the HFL to your phone, or from
your phone to the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from the HFL to the
phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dial
tones will be sent, and the call will
continue.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from your phone to
the HFL.
2.
1.
3.
3.
To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to your
phone, do this:
To transfer a call from your phone to the
HFL, do this:
Receiving a Call Transferring a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
374
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３７９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
canceled.’’
The HFL phonebook can store up to
50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types of
numbers. For example, you can store
a phone number and use it to make a
call, or you can store an account
number and use it during a call to a
menu-driven phone system.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to store?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number for account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
number) has been stored.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891. Say enter, or continue to add
numbers.’’
1.
2.
4.
5.
3.
1.
2.
To mute your voice, do this:
To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:
Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
375
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８０
2009 Pilot
To edit the number of a name, do this:
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘What is the new number for
Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The number has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219. Say enter, or
continue to add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, receive
contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook in the
order which they were stored.
When the end of the list is
reached, the HFL response is,
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
2.
1.
3.
4.
2.
1.
2.
3.
1.
4.5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
376
０８／０３／１０ １８：１７：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８１
2009 Pilot
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:
handsfreelink.
honda.com
To store a phone number from your
phone:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
saysthenameyouwanttocall,for
example, Eric, press the Talk
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
You can store the desired number to
the HFL phonebook directly from
your mobile phone.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888)
9-
HONDA-9 .You can see your
phone’s
owner’s manual for
information.
With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,
edit, delete, receive contact and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Receive
contact.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘The receive process requires
operation of your Bluetooth device.
For safety, only perform this
function while the vehicle is
stopped. HFL is now waiting to
receive a contact from a Bluetooth
device.’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
2.
1.
3.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Storing a Phone Number Directly
from Your Phone
Features
377
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８２
2009 Pilot
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
If you want to continue to store
any other numbers, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘HFL is now waiting
to receive a contact from a
Bluetooth device.’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan
at work has been stored. Would
you like HFL to receive another
contact?’’
If you do not want to continue to
store any other numbers, press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Returning to the main
menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work has
been stored. Would you like HFL
to receive another contact?’’ Go to
step 6.
If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFL response
is ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
5.
4. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
378
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
To use the cellular phonebook with
the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular
Phonebook’’ from the Information
screen. The navigation display will
change as shown above.
If any phonebook is not stored and
your phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.
PIN Number. This option allows you
to add, change, or remove a PIN
number for any phonebook that has
been imported.
Import Cellular Phonebook: This
option allows you to store the
phonebook of your cellular phone in
the HFL. When you link your phone
to the HFL and select this option, the
system will start importing and
loading the phonebook.
The cellular phonebook option
allows you to store up to 1,000 names
and 10,000 phone numbers in the
phonebook of Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink from your cellular
phonebook. The maximum names
and numbers to be stored varies on
the data size. With the HFL, you can
then automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888)
9-
HONDA-9. You can see your
phone’s
owner’s manual for
information.
handsfreelink.
honda.com
Cellular Phonebook Options
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
379
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８４
2009 Pilot
Search Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to search the
phone numbers stored in the HFL.
When you enter keyword for a
person’s name, such as the first
name or last name, the system will
find the number you want and let
you make calls.
Delete Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
select this option, the system will
automatically delete the phonebook
of the linked phone from the HFL
(see page ).
You can import the phonebook of
your cellular phone in the HFL. Link
your phone to the HFL and select
‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ from
the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. When
the message ‘‘The import was
successful.’’ is displayed, push in on
the Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
For information on linking to the
HFL, see page .369
383
To import the cellular phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
380
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８５
2009 Pilot
To search the imported phonebook
You can search the stored number
by entering keywords to make calls
by using the HFL.
Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
Enter the keyword for a person’s
name, such as the first name or last
name, using the Interface Dial. If the
system does not find an exact match,
say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish
entering the keyword.
The system will display a list of
person’s names, with the closest
match to the name you entered at
the top of the list.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
381
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８６
2009 Pilot
−Select the number (1 6) of the
desired person from the list.
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
person. If a name has more than
threecategoryicons,‘‘ ’’is
displayed.
The following category icons will
appear:
After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the person’s
phone numbers.
Select the desired number from the
list to make a call.
…
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
382
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
Preference
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８７
2009 Pilot
To store a number in the Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To delete the imported phonebook
You can delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL.
Link your phone to the HFL and
select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
Select the desired number from the
list to store it in the HFL.
Say or select ‘‘STORE IN
HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a
number to call’’ screen. The screen
shown above will appear.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
383
０８／０３／１０ １８：１８：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８８
2009 Pilot
After you enter the correct PIN
number, or if the phonebook you
select is not PIN protected, the
following screen appears.
Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message
‘‘The imported phonebook has been
deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
complete the deletion.
You can add, change or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the
‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The
display will change as shown above.
Select the phonebook you wish to
add the PIN number to. The
phonebook you select cannot
already have a PIN icon. The
display will change as shown
above.
1.
To add, change, or remove a PIN
number from any phonebook
To add a PIN number
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
384
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３８９
2009 Pilot
Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to
verify.
Select the phonebook that you
wish to change the PIN number
for. The display will change as
shown above.
Enter your current PIN number.2. 2.1.
To change a PIN number
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
385
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９０
2009 Pilot
Enteryournew4-digitPIN
number. You will be asked to re-
enter the PIN to verify.
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
all names in the HFL phonebook,
and all imported phonebooks.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, clear
the passcode, and restore the
defaults in the system setup. Is
this what you would like to do?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
clear all paired phones, all
phonebook entries, the passcode,
and restore the defaults in the
system setup. Say OK to proceed,
otherwise say go back or cancel.’’
3.
1.
2.
3.
To clear the system, do this:
Clearing the System
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
386
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’
If there are no paired phones
without French name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Venillez
attendre que le systeme change de
langue. Please wait while the
language is changed.’’ ‘‘La langue
a ete changee. Retour au menu
principal.’’
If there are paired phones
without French name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘English or French?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez
selectionne Français. Les noms
enregistres en mode Anglais ne
seront pas accessible en mode
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?
You have selected French. Name
tags that were stored while in
English mode will not be
accessible in French mode. Would
you like to continue? ’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to
proceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or
‘‘Cancel.’’
If you said ‘‘OK,’’ the HFL
response is, ‘‘Please wait while the
system is cleared.’’ This may take
up to 2 minutes to complete, then
the HFL response is, ‘‘The system
has been cleared. Returning to the
main menu.’’
If there are paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘Pour que le système
identifie les téléphones qui ont été
jumelés dans une autre langue, les
noms des téléphones doivent être
ré-enregistrés.’’
1.
2.
3.4.
5.
Canadian models only
To change from English to French, do
this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Changing Language
Features
387
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９２
2009 Pilot
＜＞
＜
＞
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’
If there are no paired phones
without English name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Please wait
while the language is changed.
Venillez attendre que le systeme
change de langue.’’ ‘‘The language
has been changed. Returning to
the main menu.’’
If there are paired phones
without English name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has
been changed. For the system to
identify phones that were paired
while in another language, the
phone names need to be re-
recorded.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘You have
selected English. Name tags that
were stored while in French mode
will not be accessible in English
mode. Would you like to continue?
Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les
noms enregistres en mode
Français ne seront pas accessible
en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous
contnuez?’’
The HFL response is, for example,
‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
Paul’s phone ?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
nom Français pour Pat’s
phone ?’’ Press and release the
Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de
Pat.’’ After all paired phones
missing a French name tag are re-
recorded, the HFL will prompt,
‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’
4.
1.
2.
3.
To change from French to English, do
this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
388
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９３
2009 Pilot
＜＞
＜
＞
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
is the English name for
Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for Téléphone de
Pat ?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
4.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
389
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９４
2009 Pilot
All obstacles may not always be
sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
yourvehicletomakesureitissafeto
park.
Your vehicle has a parking sensor
system. The system lets you know
theapproximatedistancebetween
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearinganobstacle,youwillheara
beeper and see system messages on
the multi-information display.
To activate the system, push the
switch on the dashboard with the
ignition in the ON (II) position. The
indicator in the switch comes on
when the system is on. To turn the
system off, push the switch again.
The system has two front corner
sensors, two rear corner sensors,
and two rear center sensors.
The rear center sensors work when
the shift lever is in reverse (R).
The corner sensors do not work
when the shift lever is in drive (D),
and the vehicle speed is more than 5
mph (8 km/h).
On Touring models
Parking Sensor System
390
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９５
2009 Pilot
Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle
When you turn the system on, all
indicators will appear on the multi-
information display, and a beeper
sounds once.
When the system senses an obstacle,
the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.
Distance
Beeper
Upper left
indicator stays on
Short beeps
Continuous
beep
Very short beeps
Upper left
indicator stays on
Upper left
indicator stays on
Indicator
About 18-24 in
(45-60 cm)
About 14-18 in
(35-45 cm)
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
CONTINUED
Corner Sensor Operation
Multi-Information Display
Messages and Beeper Operation
Parking Sensor System
Features
391
０８／０３／１０ １８：１９：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９６
2009 Pilot
Distance
Beeper
Bottom
indicator stays on
Bottom
indicator stays on
Bottom
indicator stays on
Indicator
About 24-40 in
(0.6-1 m)
About 18-24 in
(0.45-0.6 m)
About 14-18 in
(0.35-0.45 m)
About 14 in
(0.35 m) or less
Bottom
indicator stays on
Continuous
beeps
Short beeps
Very short beeps
Long beeps
Rear Center Sensor Operation
Parking Sensor System
392
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９７
2009 Pilot
The system may not function
properly under these conditions:
The sensors are covered with
snow,ice,mud,etc.
When the vehicle is on a rough
road, on grass, or on a hill.
After the vehicle has been sitting
out in hot or cold weather.
The range of the corner sensors and
the rear center sensors are limited.
Each corner sensor is capable of
sensing an obstacle only when your
vehicleis24in(60cm)orcloser.
The rear center sensor senses an
obstacle that is behind your vehicle
40 in (1 m) or closer.
Do not put any accessories on or
around the sensors.
If the system develops a problem,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKING
SENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display, and a
beeper sounds continuously. Very
often, a sensor covered with mud, ice,
snow,etc.isthecauseofthis
message. Check the sensors first. If
the message stays on or the beeper
does not stop, have the system
checked by your dealer.
CONTINUED
Parking Sensor System
Features
393
Within about 24 in (60 cm) Within about 40 in (1 m)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９８
2009 Pilot
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
When the system is affected by
some electrical equipment or
devices generating an ultrasonic
wave.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather.
The system may not sense thin or
low objects, or sonic-absorptive
materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
The system cannot sense objects
directly under the bumper.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen. On
vehicle without navigation system,
the rear view is shown on the left
side of the inside mirror.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Canadian Owners:
This ISM device complies with Canadian
ICES-001.
On EX-L and Touring models
Parking Sensor System, Rearview Camera and Monitor
Rearview Camera and Monitor
394
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０３９９
2009 Pilot
Monitor brightness is adjusted
automatically by sensors. If you use
the monitor continuously at high
temperature, the monitor will
gradually dim.
The inside mirror will be hot when
you use the monitor for an extended
period of time.
If a bright light (such as sunlight) is
shining on the inside mirror, the
image may be difficult to see.
You can turn the monitor on and off
by pressing the monitor off button
when the shift lever is in reverse.
The monitor turns on everytime you
shift to reverse, even if you turned it
off the last time.
When in reverse, the navigation
buttons are locked out, except the
interface dial on the dashboard. Turn
the dial clockwise to make the
camera image brighter, and counter-
clockwise to darken the image.
On Touring models On EX-L models
Rearview Camera and Monitor
Features
395
SENSOR
MONITOR OFF BUTTON
REARVIEW MONITOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４００
2009 Pilot
396
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０１
2009 Pilot
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 398
.................Fuel Recommendation . 398
.........Service Station Procedures . 399
....................................Refueling . 399
.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 400
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 401
...................................Oil Check . 402
.............Engine Coolant Check . 402
...............................Fuel Economy . 403
...Accessories and Modifications . 406
.............................Carrying Cargo . 408
Before Driving
Before Driving
397
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０２
2009 Pilot
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page ).
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
450
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
398
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even
though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapor from going
into the atmosphere. Try filling at
another pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Refueling
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
399
HOLDER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２０：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０４
2009 Pilot
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page ).
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page
).
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
5.
6.
526
84
400
Except Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
Service Station Procedures
400
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０５
2009 Pilot
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to your left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
1. 2. 3.
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
Before Driving
401
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
CLIP
SUPPORT ROD
GRIP
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０６
2009 Pilot
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
1.
3.
2.
4.
476
479
471
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Service Station Procedures
402
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
RESERVE TANK
MIN MAX
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０７
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
403
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
471
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Avoid excessive idling
476
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Efficiently
Fuel Economy
404
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４０９
2009 Pilot
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
405
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
L per 100 km
Liter
０８／０３／１０ １８：２１：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１０
2009 Pilot
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
529
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
406
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１１
2009 Pilot
Some examples are:
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
aftermarket components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
407
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：１４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１２
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Storage compartment
Door and seat-back pockets
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
408
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CARGO AREA/UNDER
FLOOR STORAGE WELL
DOOR POCKETS
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１３
2009 Pilot
−
−×
Label Example
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,322 lbs (600 kg).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
409
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１４
2009 Pilot
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Carrying Cargo
410
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(1,022 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(722 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(572 lbs)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１５
2009 Pilot
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information
that came with your roof rack.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Ifyoufolddownthesecondor
third row seats, tie down items
that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden
stop.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Also, keep all cargo below the
bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with the
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate or the glass hatch, exhaust
gas can enter the passenger area.
To avoid the possibility of
,followthe
instructions on page .59
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
carbon
monoxide poisoning
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
411
０８／０３／１０ １８：２２：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１６
2009 Pilot
The four hooks on the side panels
canbeusedtoinstallanetfor
securing items. Each hook is
designed to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)
of weight.
Theseparationnetcanbeusedto
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be tied down, as the net
may not prevent them from being
thrown about the vehicle in a crash
or a sudden stop.
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do
not install the cover over the larger
area if the third row seats are not
folded down.
Your vehicle also has grocery
hook(s) on the side panels and on
the back of the third row seats in the
cargo area.
They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook.
Cargo HooksOptional Separation Net
Optional Cargo Cover
Carrying Cargo
412
CARGO
HOOKS
GROCERY HOOK
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１７
2009 Pilot
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 system (4WD
models only), the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system, the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer or drive off-
highway.
........................Driving Guidelines . 414
........................Preparing to Drive . 414
.......................Starting the Engine . 415
Check Starter System
.................................Message . 416
..............Automatic Transmission . 417
..............................VTM-4 System . 422
...........................................Parking . 423
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 424
.............................Braking System . 432
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 433
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
),
aka Electronic Stability
........Control (ESC), System . 435
...........................Towing a Trailer . 438
Off-Highway Driving
..................................Guidelines . 453
Driving
Driving
413
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１８
2009 Pilot
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Your vehicle is equipped with a four-
wheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of front-
wheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
brakingthatyouwouldinatwo-
wheel drive vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
152
See page for off-highway driving
guidelines.
4WD models only
453
Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines Preparing to Drive
414
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４１９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
seconds until the engine starts.
If you hold the ignition switch in
the START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
depending on the outside
temperature, runs for about 10 to
25 seconds until the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Apply the parking brake.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Your vehicle’s starter system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages in the information
display or multi-information
display (depending on models)
(seepages,,,and
).
Make sure the doors, the tailgate,
and the glass hatch are securely
closed and locked. 1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
15
10.
168
131
818065
93
Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
Starting the Engine
Driving
415
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .133
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２０
2009 Pilot
If this message is on, the ignition
switchhastobeheldinthe
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignitionswitchcanbeheldinthat
position up to 15 seconds.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starter
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
If there is a problem with the starter
system, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON (II) position. You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starter system has a
problem.
5.
6.
On Touring models
Starting the Engine
Check Starter System Message
416
U.S.
Canada
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
). To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and press
the release button on the side of the
shiftlever.Youcannotshiftoutof
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
94
On Touring models
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
417
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２２
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestop,andthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the shift lever. Make sure your
foot is off the accelerator pedal.
420
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
DtoD
DtoD
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Press the D button.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
Park (P)
418
０８／０３／１０ １８：２３：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２３
2009 Pilot
−−−
CONTINUED
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
To use D , press the
D button when the shift lever is in
the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-
lartoD,exceptonlythefirstthree
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D) Drive (D ) Second (2)
3
Driving
419
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２４
2009 Pilot
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Set the parking brake.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
1.
2.
3
Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseFirst (1)
Automatic Transmission
420
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２５
2009 Pilot
Insert the built-in key into the shift
lock release slot.
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Use a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or metal
fingernail file to carefully pry up
the edge of the cover and remove
it from the slot.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then install the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the underside.
Return the key to the ignition
switch, press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
421
COVER
RELEASE BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２６
2009 Pilot
The vehicle must be stopped with
the engine running.
do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
Move the shift lever to D or D .
Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
If more traction is needed when your
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to
become stuck, you can use the
VTM-4 LOCK button to increase
torque to the rear wheels.
The variable torque management
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically
transfers varying amounts of engine
torque to the rear wheels under
lower traction conditions.
1.
2.
3.
3
4WD models only
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,
VTM-4 System
422
Do not continuously spin the front tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the front tires can cause transmission
or rear differential damage.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear differential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２７
2009 Pilot
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Turn off the lights.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Make sure the glass hatch is
closed securely.
Except LX models
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
423
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２８
2009 Pilot
−
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
512
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
424
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４２９
2009 Pilot
−
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See
on page .
501
436
500
79
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
Low Tire
Pressure Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Driving
425
０８／０３／１０ １８：２４：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３０
2009 Pilot
−
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
512
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
426
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３１
2009 Pilot
−
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
Youshouldstopandcheckyourtires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
513
CONTINUED
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
427
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３２
2009 Pilot
−
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
intheowner’smanual(seepage
).
Toselectthetirepressuremonitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when all
tire pressures are normal.
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
youcheckandadjustyourtire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
thetiresareoverinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
500
94
501
Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
428
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３３
2009 Pilot
−
CONTINUED
To see the inflation pressures of all
four tires, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown above.
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
429
U.S. models Canadian models
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３４
2009 Pilot
−
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
thetirepressuremonitorshowsa
‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’
message and the tire pressure
readings are not displayed. If this
happens, you will first see a system
warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page ).
If any of the tires has low pressure,
thetirepressuremonitoralsoshows
the above message to warn you
about the low tire pressure when you
select the display by pressing the
INFO button several times.
Following this display, press the
SEL/RESET button to see each tire
pressure. When you continue driving
after installing the spare tire, you will
also see this message on the multi-
information display. 427
TPMS System Failure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
430
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３５
2009 Pilot
−
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multi-
information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
sparetire(seepage ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
436
512
CONTINUED
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
431
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３６
2009 Pilot
−
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Braking System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models, Braking System
432
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３７
2009 Pilot
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
may hear some noise. This is normal:
it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
brakes. On dry pavement, you will
need to press on the brake pedal
very hard before the ABS activates.
However, you may feel the ABS
activate immediately if you are trying
to stop on snow or ice.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Braking System Design
Brake Wear Indicators
Driving
433
０８／０３／１０ １８：２５：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３８
2009 Pilot
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
It only helps with steering
control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If this happens, you will also see
‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
messages on the multi-information
display.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
93
527
527
On Touring models
On Touring models
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS Indicator
434
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４３９
2009 Pilot
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
On Touring models
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
435
NOTE:
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４０
2009 Pilot
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, see
page .
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, see page .
Or, if the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message with the
indicator flashing, see page .
In this case, you cannot turn off the
VSA using the OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
424
427
94
Except Touring models
On Touring models
VSA Off Switch
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
436
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４１
2009 Pilot
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
start assist feature to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling on steep
inclines as you move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator.
This feature operates for up to 1.5
seconds in any drive gear position
(when faced uphill) or in reverse
(when faced downhill). This feature
requires that the vehicle has come to
a complete stop before it can work.
Hillstartassistmaynotholda
heavily loaded vehicle, such as when
your vehicle is connected to a trailer,
or prevent your vehicle from rolling
downhill on a very steep or slippery
slope.
506
VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
437
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４２
2009 Pilot
The maximum allowable weight of
the trailer and everything in or on it
depends on the number of occupants
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
being towed (see page ).
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage
if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).
442
398
453
Towing a Trailer
Load Limit
Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines
Total Trailer Weight
Break-In Period
438
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４３
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
＊
＊
The weight that the tongue of a fully
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
shouldbe5to10percentofthetotal
trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8
to 15 percent of total trailer weight
for all other trailers. (See page
for limits for your towing
situation). Too much tongue load
reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
2:LXmodels
1:ExceptLXmodels
on the rear axle
442
4WD models:
2WD models:
4WD models:
2WD models:
2
1
Towing a Trailer
Tongue Load
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Driving
439
5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)
6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
3,362 lbs (1,525 kg)
3,251 lbs (1,475 kg)
2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
3,196 lbs (1,450 kg)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４４
2009 Pilot
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described next.
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer
with the proper hitch is:
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
442
4WD models:
2WD models:
Estimating LoadsGross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Towing a Trailer
440
9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)
8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２６：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４５
2009 Pilot
Estimated
tongue load is:
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Measure and record the distance
from the ground to the bottom of
the trailer hitch.
Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
Subtract the second measurement
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.
Estimated
tongue load is:
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
Ifthedifferenceismorethan1¾
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
If the
difference is:
5/8’’
11/4’’
13/4’’
If the
difference is:
5/8’’
11/4’’
13/4’’
21/4’’
Ifthedifferenceismorethan2¼
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2WD models 4WD models
Towing a Trailer
To Estimate the Tongue Load
Driving
441
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４６
2009 Pilot
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
−−
＊
＊＊
Towing is Not Recommended
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
Towing is Not Recommended
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
2WD models
4WD models
Towing a Trailer
442
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
3,300 lbs (1,497 kg)
3,100 lbs (1,406 kg)
3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)
2,800 lbs (1,270 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
230 lbs (104 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)
4,100 lbs (1,860 kg)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)
3,800 lbs (1,724 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
400 lbs (181 kg)
330 lbs (150 kg)
270 lbs (122 kg)
190 lbs (86 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68
kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum
trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).
Recommended tongue load should be 5 10% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
439
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４７
2009 Pilot
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)
Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit (4WD models): 6,096 lbs
(2,765 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 5,952 lbs
(2,700 kg)
If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit (4WD models): 3,175 lbs
(1,440 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 3,031 lbs
(1,375 kg)
Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit (4WD models): 3,362 lbs
(1,525 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 3,196 lbs
(1,450 kg)
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Checking Loads
Towing a Trailer
Driving
443
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４８
2009 Pilot
Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page .
Recommended: see page .
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers
Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page .
Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
Check the gross combined weight.
Limit (4WD models): 9,579 lbs
(4,345 kg)
Limit (2WD models): 8,466 lbs
(3,840 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
7.
8.
6.5.
442
442
439
Towing a Trailer
444
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４４９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers trailer packages
that include a ball mount, hitch plug,
and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit is
also available from your dealer.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
Honda recommends that any trailer
with a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more has its own brakes.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
Towing a Trailer
Trailer BrakesHitch
Weight Distributing Hitch
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Driving
445
０８／０３／１３ １０：３２：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５０
2009 Pilot
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
A factory installed, 4-pin gray
connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the
parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake
controllers. A jumper harness to
adapt your electric trailer brake
controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer.
Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains
Sway Control
Trailer Mirrors
446
GROUND
(BLACK)
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
STOP
(SKY BLUE)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５１
2009 Pilot
＋
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. When replacing the
compact spare with a full size spare,
remove the plastic spacer (see page
). Store the plastic spacer and
compact spare together. Reinstall
thespacerbeforeonceagainstowing
the compact spare.
See page for proper tire size,
page for how to store a full size
wheel and tire, and page for
information on changing a flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
505
506
513
519
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
Spare Tires
Driving
447
GROUND
(BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(RED)
TAILLIGHTS
(GREEN)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(WHITE)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BACK-UP LIGHTS
(YELLOW)
GROUND
(BLACK)
B CHARGE
(BLUE)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５２
2009 Pilot
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
connector, do this:
Make sure the connector and the
socketarefreeofdirt,moisture,
or other foreign material.
Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
hitch as standard equipment.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
The jumper harness and trailer
brakefusearestoredintheglove
box.
Also see page for trailer-related
information.
1.
2.
445
On Touring models
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors
Towing Equipment
448
TRAILER HITCH
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
LID
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
SOCKET
RETAINING
TAB
RETAINING
TAB
7-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５３
2009 Pilot
＋
Refer to the above illustrations for
wiring information.
The trailer jumper harness is used to
install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see on page .
Insert the connector securely into
the socket.
Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
retaining tab of the connector to
prevent disconnection during
operation.
Insert the trailer brake fuse into the
secondary under-hood fuse box (see
page ).
3.
445
533
On Touring models On Touring models
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Jumper HarnessTrailer Connector Sockets
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Brake Fuse
Driving
449
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
SMALL
LIGHT
(GREEN)
LEFT
TURN/
STOP
(RED)
BACK LIGHT
(YELLOW)
GROUND
(BLACK)
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BRAKE LIGHTS
(SKY BLUE)
B
CHARGE
(BLUE)
RIGHT
TURN/
STOP
(WHITE)
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
(BROWN/
WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５４
2009 Pilot
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer
450
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５５
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use D position when towing a trailer
on level roads. D is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘
’’onthenextpagefor
additional gear information.)
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
3
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving
on Hills
Making Turns and Braking
Driving
451
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５６
2009 Pilot
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page .
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D . Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
535
422
bottom
3
3
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Backing Up
Parking
Retrieving a Boat
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle
Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
452
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５７
2009 Pilot
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page and ).
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
409 438
Important Safety PrecautionsGeneral Information
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
453
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２８：５３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５８
2009 Pilot
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in D position will help you
have a smoother start on snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue,
. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
do not try to
turn around
Check Out Your Vehicle
Remember
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles
Driving on Slopes
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
454
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４５９
2009 Pilot
If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
Lock (see page ). Carefully try to
go in the direction (forward or
reverse) that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
speeds. It will not help you get out
and may cause damage to the
transmission or VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose.
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.
Proceed without shifting or changing
speeds, and do not stop the vehicle
or shut off the engine.
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushingwatercanwashthe
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
422
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream
Driving
455
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６０
2009 Pilot
Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
You may be able to safely tow a
lightweight trailer (such as a
motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
road if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
456
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６１
2009 Pilot
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models), and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 458
....................Maintenance Minder . 459
..............................Fluid Locations . 474
......Engine Compartment Covers . 475
........................Adding Engine Oil . 476
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 477
..............................Engine Coolant . 479
....................Windshield Washers . 481
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 482
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 484
.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 484
....................................Brake Fluid . 485
....................Power Steering Fluid . 486
....................................Timing Belt . 486
.............................................Lights . 487
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 494
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 494
.....................................Floor Mats . 495
.................................Wiper Blades . 496
...............................................Tires . 500
...................Checking the Battery . 508
.............................Vehicle Storage . 510
469
Maintenance
Maintenance
457
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６２
2009 Pilot
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
458
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６３
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models) to show you when you
should have your dealer perform
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance services.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the select/
reset knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page ).81
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
CONTINUED
Except Touring models
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
459
ENGINE OIL
LIFE DISPLAY
SELECT/
RESET KNOB
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６４
2009 Pilot
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
near the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Maintenance Minder
460
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６５
2009 Pilot
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
462
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
461
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：２９：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６６
2009 Pilot
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
1.
2.473
Except Touring models Except Touring models
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
462
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６７
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the INFO ( / ) button on the
steering wheel repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed (see page
).
3. 4.
86
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
463
ENGINE OIL
LIFE DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO ( / )
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０４／１４ １８：２０：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６８
2009 Pilot
▲▼
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 percent or less, the display shows
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the
maintenance item code(s) along with
the engine oil life on the multi-
information display.
Maintenance Minder
464
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４６９
2009 Pilot
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until your vehicle have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer.
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
469
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
465
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７０
2009 Pilot
▲▼
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until your vehicle have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message and along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the engine oil life
reaches to 0 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) on the multi-information
display.
Maintenance Minder
466
U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７１
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance done by
your dealer immediately.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO ( / )
button after cancel it.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until your vehicle have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the engine oil
life blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message along with the maintenance
item code(s) on the multi-
information display.
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
not
Maintenance
467
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：４１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７２
2009 Pilot
▲▼
▲▼
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO ( / )
button after canceling it.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multi-
information display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
thetotalmileageaftertheremaining
oillifebecame0%,andthe
maintenance item code(s).
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the negative
mileage blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message along with the maintenance
item code(s) on the multi-
information display.
469
Maintenance Minder
not
468
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
Canada
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７３
2009 Pilot
Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multi-
information display.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel until you see
the engine oil life display.
1.
2.
3.
473
CONTINUED
On Touring models On Touring models
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
469
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM(S)
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３０：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７４
2009 Pilot
▲▼
Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
4.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
470
U.S. model is shown.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７５
2009 Pilot
＃
−
−
−
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the odometer/
trip meter display or the multi-
information display.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
402
402
482
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
471
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：１２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７６
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.501
485
487
Maintenance Minder
472
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７７
2009 Pilot
＃
＃
−−
＃
Maintenance Minder
473
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Symbol Symbol
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
471
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every
60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
:
1:
NOTE :
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４７８
2009 Pilot
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by the
cover. You may need to remove the
cover and the air intake cover when
you perform some simple
maintenance work.
To remove the front bulkhead cover
and the air intake cover, remove the
holding clips with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Covers are secured by holding clips.
Engine Compartment Covers
Maintenance
475
FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
HOLDING CLIP
AIR INTAKE COVER
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：３１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８０
2009 Pilot
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
476
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：３８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８１
2009 Pilot
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multi-
information display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on models). The oil and
filter collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
477
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８２
2009 Pilot
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
478
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
) Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３１：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８３
2009 Pilot
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
479
MAX
MIN
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８４
2009 Pilot
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
3.
4.
1.
2.
5. 6.
Engine Coolant
480
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
MAX
MIN
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８５
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
).
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOW
WASHER FLUID’’ message appears
on the multi-information display.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
78
On Touring models
Except Touring models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
481
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８６
2009 Pilot
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on models).
1.
2. 3.
4.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
482
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８７
2009 Pilot
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Always use Honda Genuine
ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission
fluid).
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
483
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission fluids.
Using transmission fluid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting from the use of
transmission fluid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：３５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８８
2009 Pilot
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display. This service
may be needed more often under
certain driving conditions (see page
).
Always use Honda VTM-4
Differential Fluid, and have your
dealer replace the rear differential
fluid.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90. Have the fluid replaced by
your dealer.
The transfer assembly should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display.
473
4WD models only 4WD models only
Rear Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid Transfer Assembly Fluid
484
FILLER BOLT
CORRECT LEVEL
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４８９
2009 Pilot
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Replace the brake fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message on the information display
or multi-information display
(depending on models).
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Brake Fluid
Maintenance
485
MAXMIN
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９０
2009 Pilot
−−Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
If you are not sure how to add
fluid, contact your dealer.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicle in any of the following
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
486
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３２：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
If you need to change the
headlight bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the front end of the air
intake duct by pulling it out.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustmentsshouldbedonebyyour
dealer or other qualified technician.
The high beam headlight bulb, the
low beam headlight bulb, and
daytime running light bulb are
replaced the same way.
1.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/Daytime
Running Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
487
CONNECTOR
BULB
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３３：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９２
2009 Pilot
Open the hood.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lights
Replacing Front Turn Signal/
Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
488
SOCKET
BULB
CONNECTOR
BULB
CONNECTOR
BULB
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT
０８／１２／１５ １６：１２：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９３
2009 Pilot
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
cover. Remove the covers by
carefully prying on the edge with a
small flat-tipped screwdriver.
1.
4.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Except LX models
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
489
BULB
SOCKET
SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
０８／１２／１５ １６：１３：１０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９４
2009 Pilot
Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the front fog light
assembly from the bumper.
Open the tailgate.
Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
Remove the assembly from the
mounting holes by pulling it out.
Place a cloth on the inner edge of
the assembly. Loosen the
assembly by carefully prying on
thetopandsideedgeswithasmall
flat-tipped screwdriver. Use your
fingers to further pull it loose.
1. 3.
3.
4.
2.
2.
4.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Rear Pillar)
490
CONNECTOR
０８／１２／１５ １６：１３：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９５
2009 Pilot
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
Align the two tabs on the light
assembly with the mounting holes
and install the rear light assembly
in the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight,
back-up light, side marker light, or
turn signal light.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
5.
On Touring models
Lights
Side Turn Signal Lights
Maintenance
491
BULB
TABS
SOCKET
０８／１２／１５ １６：１３：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９６
2009 Pilot
Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment. Remove each lens
segment by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Remove the screw under each lens.
Pull the high-mount brake light
assembly out of the vehicle.
Remove the lens from the light
assembly.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the lens back on the light
assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
Remove the two mounting screws
from the light assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
6.
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
492
LENS SEGMENT
０８／１２／１５ １６：１３：４６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９７
2009 Pilot
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Put the lens back into the light
assembly, right side first. Push on
the left edge until it snaps into
place.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment to prevent
scratching. Insert a small flat-tip
screwdriver between the left edge
of the lens and the housing. The
lens will come down.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
493
BULB
LENS
SCREWDRIVER
LENS
CLOTH
０８／１２／１５ １６：１３：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９８
2009 Pilot
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display (depending on
the models). It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air, or if the flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning the Seat BeltsDust and Pollen Filter
Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
494
LOOP
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０４９９
2009 Pilot
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward, possibly
interfering with the pedals, or
backwards, making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Floor Mats
Maintenance
495
FRONT
REAR
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５００
2009 Pilot
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
To replace the front wiper blades:
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make
sure not to drop the wiper blade or
wiper arm down on the windshield.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
496
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０１
2009 Pilot
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
6.
7.
4.
5.
3.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
497
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０２
2009 Pilot
Toreplacetherearwiperblade: Slidethebladeoutofthewiper
arm.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Raise the wiper arm off the glass
hatch and hold it.
3.
1.
2.
Wiper Blades
498
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
WIPER ARM
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０３
2009 Pilot
Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or the hatch glass.
4.
5.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
499
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：４０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０４
2009 Pilot
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Thetirepressuremonitoringsystem
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page or
for more information.
424
427
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
500
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０５
2009 Pilot
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings.Thisisnormal.Donotlet
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
544
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tires
Maintenance
501
P245/65R17 105T
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０８／０３／１０ １８：３４：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０６
2009 Pilot
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
546
Tire Inspection Tire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
Tires
502
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：０７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０７
2009 Pilot
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models). Move the tires to the
positions shown in the diagram each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
CONTINUED
Tire Maintenance Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
503
Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０８
2009 Pilot
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Tires
504
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：２２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５０９
2009 Pilot
If you store a full size tire on the
hoist, remove the spacer.
Otherwise the hoist will not fully
return to its original position.
To remove the spacer, loosen the
two bolts.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Tires
Maintenance
505
SPACER
BOLTS (10 mm)
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１０
2009 Pilot
＋Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
544
546
Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving Snow Tires
Tires
506
17x71/2J
P245/65R17 105T
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１１
2009 Pilot
＃
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear them contacting the body
or chassis, stop and investigate.
Make sure the chains are installed
tightly, and that they are not
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soonasyoustartdrivingoncleared
roads.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below.
SCC Super Z-6 SZ-435
Tire Chains Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
507
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
０８／０５／０８ １９：２２：３３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１２
2009 Pilot
−
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page ).
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
311
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
508
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：５１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１３
2009 Pilot
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting will be reset to 1:00. To set
the time again, follow the setting
procedure (see page ).312
Except Touring models On Touring models
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
509
０８／０３／１０ １８：３５：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１４
2009 Pilot
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Vehicle Storage
510
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：０４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１５
2009 Pilot
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 512
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 513
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 520
................................Jump Starting . 521
..............If the Engine Overheats . 523
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 525
..........Charging System Indicator . 525
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 526
...............Brake System Indicator . 527
..............................................Fuses . 528
..............................Fuse Locations . 532
......................Emergency Towing . 535
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 536
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
511
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１６
2009 Pilot
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
If you store a full size tire on the
hoist, remove the spacer.
Otherwise the hoist will not fully
return to its original position.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare tire. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the spare, this indicator begins
to flash, then stays on again. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).430
Except Touring models
On Touring models
Compact Spare Tire
512
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：１７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１７
2009 Pilot
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Open the tailgate.
Push the rear edge of the handle
to raise the handle loop and pull up
the loop to raise the cargo area
floor.
Remove the cargo area floor.
2.
1.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
513
JACK
TOOLS
SPARE TIRE
CARGO AREA
FLOOR
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：２５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１８
2009 Pilot
The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover and the
rubber cap on the cargo area
lining to access the shaft for the
sparetirehoist.
Put the extension with the wheel
nut wrench on the hoist shaft.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
The tools and jack are under the
cargo area behind a cover on the
passenger’s side. Remove the
cover and take the jack out of the
tool kit case.
Fold down the third row seat (see
page ).
5. 6.
7.
159
8.
Changing a Flat Tire
514
COVER
KNOB
PLASTIC COVER
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to fit
the hoist shaft. Do not use any other
tool.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５１９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
Keep turning the wheel nut
wrench to create slack in the cable.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Placethejackunderthejacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change.
9.
10.
12.11.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
515
BRACKET
JACKING POINT
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：４２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２０
2009 Pilot
Turn the dial at the bottom of the
jack clockwise until the top of the
jack contacts the jacking point.
Make sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Attach the stay to the extension,
then attach the wheel nut wrench
to the end of the extension.
Insert the hook at the end of the
stay into the opening on the dial at
the bottom of the jack.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
13. 14. 15.
Changing a Flat Tire
516
DIAL
CONNECTOR BUTTON
DIAL
HOOK
STAY
CONNECTOR BUTTON
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２１
2009 Pilot
Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
wrench) clockwise as shown to
raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
16. 17.
18.
19.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
517
BRAKE HUB
０８／０３／１０ １８：３６：５５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２２
2009 Pilot
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire, and place the flat tire
under the hoist, with the valve
stem facing up.
20.
21. 22.
Changing a Flat Tire
518
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：００ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２３
2009 Pilot
Slowly turn the extension with the
wheel nut wrench clockwise to
take up the slack of the hoist cable.
Make sure the bracket is seated in
the center hole of the flat tire.
Turn the extension with the wheel
nut wrench clockwise until the flat
tire rests against the underbody of
the vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
Store the jack and the tools in the
tool box.
Refer to
(see page or ).426 431
23.
24.
25.
26.
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with
TPMS
Taking Care of the Unexpected
519
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is left down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２４
2009 Pilot
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
521
535
508
521
76
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
The Starter Operates Normally
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
520
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：１８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２５
2009 Pilot
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the warning indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, audio system, lights, etc.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
1.
2.
415
529
535
CONTINUED
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
521
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２６
2009 Pilot
−
＋
＋
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
5.
7.
4.
6.
3.
Jump Starting
522
BOOSTER BATTERY
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２７
2009 Pilot
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
523
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：４５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２８
2009 Pilot
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
535
10.
11.
535
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
524
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３７：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５２９
2009 Pilot
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
402
476
535
93
On Touring models
On Touring models
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
525
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：０５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３０
2009 Pilot
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
thesecodesmaybeerased.Ittakes
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).
93
554
On Touring models
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Code
Emissions Testing
526
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：１３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３１
2009 Pilot
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
485
93
93
535
On Touring models
On Touring models
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
527
U.S. Canada
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：２１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３２
2009 Pilot
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes.
The interior fuse box is underneath
the dashboard on the driver’s side.
Therearfuseboxislocatedatthe
left side of cargo area.
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
locatedonthepassenger’sside.The
secondary fuse box is located next to
the battery.
Fuses
528
UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)
LID
TAB
TAB
REAR
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：２９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３３
2009 Pilot
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
, , and , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse boxes by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
3.1.
2.
532 533 534
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
529
BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：３７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３４
2009 Pilot
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and rear
fuse box, and all the fuses in the
interior and rear fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
5.4.
Fuses
530
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３５
2009 Pilot
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page ).
6.
311
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
531
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：４８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３６
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
No. Amps. Amps.No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
120 A
80 A
50 A
50 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Main Fuse
Not Used
OP Main
IG Main
Not Used
Not Used
Head Light Main
Power Window Main
Not Used
Condenser Fan
Cooling Fan
Rear Defroster
Blower
Front Fog Light
Sub
ACM
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Reclining
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Slide
Oil Level
Head Light Hi Main
Radio
IG Coil
Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back UP
Fuse Locations
532
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
０８／０３／１０ １８：３８：５４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３７
2009 Pilot
Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Small Light
Stop Lamp
Back Lamp
Turn Lamp, Hazard
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
1
2
3
4
Power Tail Gate Motor
VTM-4
Trailer Main
VSA F/S Relay
1
2
3
4
40 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
30 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
Rear Blower
VSA Motor
Hazard
Power Tail Gate Closer
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
Driver’s Power Seat Slide
Stop & Horn
Rear Console Accessory
Socket
Rear Wiper
Trailer E-Brake
A/C Inverter
Center Console Accessory
Socket
Trailer Charge
Front Accessory Socket
Rear Accessory Socket
Glass Hatch Motor
Rear Heated Seat
Head Light Washer Motor
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
533
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX REAR FUSE BOX
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３８
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
No. Amps.
Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.Circuits Protected
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
VTM-4
Fuel Pump
ACG
VSA
Heated Seat
1
2
3
4
5
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
VBSOL2
STRLD
Not Used
Not Used
Driver’s Power Window
HAC OP
Moonroof
Door Lock
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Audio Amp
Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Window
Driver’s Side Rear Power
Window
Not Used
ACC
HAC
Day Light
Wiper
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
Not Used
Auto Light
Auto Light
ODS
Meter
SRS
Right Daytime Running Light
Left Daytime Running Light
Small Lights (Interior)
Small Lights (Exterior)
Right Head Light Low
Left Head Light Low
Daytime Running Light Main
Small Lights Main
Not Used
TPMS
Head Light Low Main
: On vehicles with rear entertainment system
Fuse Locations
534
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
０８／０３／１０ １８：２７：５７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５３９
2009 Pilot
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
4WD models only
Emergency Towing
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
535
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：１６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４０
2009 Pilot
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.
Remove the cover, put cloth on the
edge of the cover and carefully pry
with a small flat-tip screwdriver or
a metal fingernail file.
Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench placed behind a
cover under the cargo area.
Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
The cover is attached to the
bumper with a tether.
1. 2.
3.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
536
Front
COVER
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
TOWING HOOK
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：２４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４１
2009 Pilot
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
537
Rear
TRAILER HITCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：２８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４２
2009 Pilot
538
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４３
2009 Pilot
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 540
................................Specifications . 542
DOT Tire Quality Grading
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 544
.................................Tire Labeling . 546
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 548
.......................Emissions Controls . 551
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 553
........................Emissions Testing . 554
Technical Information
Technical Inf ormation
539
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：３４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４４
2009 Pilot
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
540
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４５
2009 Pilot
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Inf ormation
541
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
０８／０３／１０ １８：３９：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４６
2009 Pilot
−−
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
542
Seating Capacities
Air Conditioning
Dimensions Capacities
Weights
1.98 US gal (7.5
)
2.48 US gal (9.4 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
190.9 in (4,850 mm)
78.5 in (1,995 mm)
70.9 in (1,802 mm)
21.00 US gal (79.5 )
Total
Front
Second
Third 3
3
2
8
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type ND-OIL8
21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
See the tire information label atta-
ched to the driver’s doorjamb.
8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
67.5 in (1,715 mm)
67.7 in (1,720 mm)
109.3 in (2,775 mm)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
0.214 US gal (0.81
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Transfer
assembly
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
6.9 US qt (6.5 )
72.7 in (1,846 mm)
9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)
3.6 US qt (3.4
)
8.6 US qt (8.1
)
3.6 US qt (3.4
)
8.6 US qt (8.1 )
2.79 US qt (2.64
)
3.01 US qt (2.85
)
0.45 US qt (0.43
)
0.48 US qt (0.45
)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
U.S. vehicles
Canadian
vehicles
1 : 2 : Except U.S. LX modelsU.S. LX models
2WD models
1:
2: 3:4WDmodels
2WD
4WD
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
０８／０８／２９ １６：２５：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４７
2009 Pilot
＊
−
−
−
−
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
543
Battery
Lights Fuses
Engine
Alignment
Tires
60 W12 V
12 V 55 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
8W
5W
1.4 W
3.8 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
28/8 W
5W
12 V 5 W
12 V 18 W
55 W12 V
60 W12 V
Capacity 12 V
12 V
60 AH/5 HR
72 AH/20 HR
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 21/5 W
5W12 V
Headlights
Daytime running lights
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal/
parking lights
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal/tail lights
Stop/Taillights
Rear side marker lights
Backup lights
License plate lights
Individual map lights
Cargo area lights
High mount brake lights
Vanity mirror lights
Door courtesy lights
See page 534 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 533 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
Interior
Rear
Under-hood See page 532 and 533 or the fuse
box cover.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC
VCM 6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm
)
10.5 : 1
SXU22HCR11
ILZKR7B11
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°30’
0°30’
4°12’
Size
Pressure
P245/65R17 105T
T165/80D17 104M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
:
(H11)
(HB3)
(HB3)
DENSO:
NGK:
(H11)
High
Low
Except LX models
０８／０４／１４ １８：２０：４７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４８
2009 Pilot
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear Traction
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
544
０８／０３／１０ １８：４０：３９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５４９
2009 Pilot
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
Technical Inf ormation
545
０８／０３／１０ １８：４０：４３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５０
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an
exampleoftiresizewithan
explanation of what each component
means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
P
R
DOT
B97R
245
65
17
105
T
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
546
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
(1)
(1)
(3) (2)(4)
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
P245/65R17 105T
０８／０３／１０ １８：４０：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５１
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
− Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Max Press The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Week
Year
FW6X
2202
Tire Labeling
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Technical Inf ormation
547
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５２
2009 Pilot
−
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
548
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５３
2009 Pilot
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Except Touring models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Inf ormation
549
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５４
2009 Pilot
−
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
On Touring models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
550
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５５
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
473
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Inf ormation
551
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：２７ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５６
2009 Pilot
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
552
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：３６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５７
2009 Pilot
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Inf ormation
553
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：４４ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５８
2009 Pilot
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
554
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：５１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５５９
2009 Pilot
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
7.
8. 9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Inf ormation
555
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：５６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６０
2009 Pilot
556
０８／０３／１０ １８：４１：５８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６１
2009 Pilot
....Customer Service Information . 558
....................Warranty Coverages . 559
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 560
.....................Authorized Manuals . 561
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
557
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６２
2009 Pilot
U.S. Owners:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
540
Customer Service Information
558
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Customer Relations
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：０９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６３
2009 Pilot
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2009 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2009 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
559
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：１９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６４
2009 Pilot
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
560
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：２３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６５
2009 Pilot
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S.only)
Authorized Manuals
561
Publication
Form Number
61SZA00
61SZA00EL
61SZA30
31SZA600
31SZA800
31SZAM00
31SZAQ00
HON
Form Description
2009 Honda Pilot Service Manual
2009 Honda Pilot
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2009 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual
2009 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
2009 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2009 Honda Pilot Honda Service History
2009 Honda Pilot Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
www. helminc. com
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：３２ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６６
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 68, 525
............................Jump Starting . 521
..............................Maintenance . 508
............................Specifications . 543
..............................Before Driving . 397
....................................Belts,Seat .8,20
.........................Beverage Holders . 179
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 360
..................................Booster Seats . 56
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 433
.............Break-in, New Linings . 398
............Bulb Replacement . 490, 492
...........................................Fluid . 485
.......................................Parking . 167
.................System Indicator . 69, 527
........................Wear Indicators . 433
.............................Braking System . 432
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 398
Brightness Control,
...............................Instruments . 129
................................................AAC . 298
...Accessories and Modifications . 406
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.....................................Position) . 135
............Accessory Power Sockets . 184
...........................AC Power Outlet . 185
................Active Head Restraints . 156
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 477
...........................Advanced Airbags . 29
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24
..........Airbag System Components . 24
......Air Conditioning System . 190, 197
.............Rear A/C Control . 195, 202
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 204
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 500
......................................Antifreeze . 479
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
....................Indicator Light . 70, 434
...................................Operation . 433
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 311
Anti-theft Steering Column
............................................Lock . 135
........Audio System . 206, 208, 224, 250
Auto Control Mode, Starting
........................................Engine . 415
............................Auto Door Lock . 114
...Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 137
.........................Auto Door Unlock . 115
..........Automatic Climate Control . 197
.......................Automatic Lighting . 125
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22
.............Automatic Speed Control . 348
..............Automatic Transmission . 417
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 542
...............Checking Fluid Level . 482
.......................................Shifting . 417
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 417
................Shift Lever Positions . 418
....................Shift Lock Release . 420
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 308
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
０８／０８／２９ １６：２６：０１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６８
2009 Pilot
＊
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
................................Cancel Button . 350
............................Capacities Chart . 542
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 59
..........................Cargo Area Light . 176
...................................Cargo Hook . 412
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 408
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
........................Certification Label . 540
.................................Chains, Tires . 507
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 513
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 477
......................................When to . 459
...Charging System Indicator . 68, 525
............Checklist, Before Driving . 414
................Childproof Door Locks . 142
.....................................Child Safety . 37
..............................Booster Seats . 56
.............................Child Seats . 42, 45
.....Important Safety Reminders . 37
..........................................Infants . 42
..........................Larger Children . 55
.........................................LATCH . 47
......................Risks with Airbags . 38
.............................Small Children . 43
..........................................Tether . 52
...........................Warning Labels . 60
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38
.......................................Child Seats . 45
........LATCH Anchorage Points . 47
....Tether Anchorage Points . 53, 54
.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 494
...............Climate Control System . 197
..............................................Clock . 312
....................................Coat Hooks . 183
.....................Code, Audio System . 311
........................CO in the Exhaust . 551
......................Compact Spare Tire . 512
.........................................Compass . 351
.................Console Compartment . 178
...............Consumer Information . 558
.............Controls, Instruments and . 63
....................Conversation Mirror . 182
Coolant
........................................Adding . 479
....................................Checking . 402
.........................Proper Solution . 479
...................Temperature Gauge . 80
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 551
................Cruise Control Indicator . 76
............Cruise Control Operation . 348
...................................Cup Holders . 179
.............Customer Service Office . 558
.........................Customize Settings . 95
................Door/Window Setup . 113
...........................Lighting Setup . 108
...............................Meter Setup . 101
...........................Position Setup . 106
........................Setting to Default . 98
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 490
..............................Brake Lights . 490
.................................Fog Lights . 489
................Front Parking Lights . 488
........Front Side Marker Lights . 488
.................................Headlights . 487
.................................Rear Bulbs . 490
............................Specifications . 543
....................Turn Signal Lights . 488
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 487
Index
D
C
II
０８／０８／２９ １６：２６：０８ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５６９
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
...................................Dashboard . 3, 64
..............Daytime Running Lights . 126
.................................Dead Battery . 521
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 560
..............Defogger, Rear Window . 128
......Defrosting the Windows . 192, 201
..........................Differential Fluid . 542
....................................Dimensions . 542
.............Dimming the Headlights . 124
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 482
..................................Engine Oil . 402
..........................Directional Signals . 71
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 433
.......................................Disc Care . 283
........................Disc Changer . 240, 272
Disc Changer Error
...........................Messages . 249, 282
....................Disc Player . 216, 240, 272
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 478
Doors
.................................Indicator . 11, 93
............Locking and Unlocking . 136
..................Lockout Prevention . 142
....................Power Door Locks . 136
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 544
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 413
....................................Economy . 403
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 171
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 494
......DVD Player Error Messages . 343
...................................DVD Player . 318
..............................Economy, Fuel . 403
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
........................................System . 435
..................................Emergencies . 511
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 521
...........Brake System Indicator . 527
................Changing a Flat Tire . 513
.....Charging System Indicator . 525
..................Checking the Fuses . 529
...........Driving with a Flat Tire . 512
.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 128
............................Jump Starting . 521
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 525
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 526
..................Overheated Engine . 523
.......................................Towing . 535
.........................Emergency Brake . 167
....................Emergency Flashers . 128
......................Emergency Towing . 535
.......................Emissions Controls . 551
........................Emissions Testing . 554
Engine
..............Check Starter System . 416
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 80
.........................If it Won’t Start . 520
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 68, 526
.......................................Oil Life . 459
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 68, 525
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 476
...............................Overheating . 523
............................Specifications . 543
............................Speed Limiter . 420
.......................................Starting . 415
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 551
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 59
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 552
Index
E
INDEX
III
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：４９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７０
2009 Pilot
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
..........................Fan, Interior . 191, 200
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 189
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 399
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 494
...............................................Oil . 477
...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 128
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 513
.....................................Floor Mats . 495
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 482
..........................................Brake . 485
..........................Power Steering . 486
.......................Rear Differential . 484
...................Transfer Assembly . 484
..................Windshield Washer . 481
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 306
.....................................Fog Lights . 126
..............Folding the Second Seat . 158
.................Folding the Third Seat . 159
........................Four-way Flashers . 128
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 27
......................................Front Seat . 152
....................................Adjusting . 152
.....................................Airbags . 9, 27
.......................................Heaters . 162
.................................................Fuel . 398
......................Fill Door and Cap . 399
...........................................Gauge . 80
................Octane Requirement . 398
...............................Oxygenated . 398
........................Reserve Indicator . 77
........................Tank, Filling the . 399
......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 400
...............................Fuel Economy . 403
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 529
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 487
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 360
..............................HFL Buttons . 361
............Hazard Warning Flashers . 128
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 404
.........................................Gasoline . 398
...........................................Gauge . 80
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 78
................Octane Requirement . 398
........................Tank, Refueling . 399
................Gas Station Procedures . 399
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 80
...............................................Fuel . 80
...............................Speedometer . 80
.................................Tachometer . 80
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 439
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 440
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 418
...................................Glass Hatch . 146
......................................Glove Box . 181
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 439
Index
G
H
F
IV
０８／０８／２９ １６：２６：１５ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７１
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 540
Ignition
............................................Keys . 132
.........................................Switch . 135
............Timing Control System . 552
......................Immobilizer System . 133
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
...Indicators, Instrument Panel . 65, 66
...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 70
....................................A/T Temp . 74
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 69, 527
................Charging System . 68, 525
.............................Cruise Control . 76
.................................Cruise Main . 76
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 77
...................................Fog Lights . 76
...................................High Beam . 76
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 76
.....................................Lights On . 76
......................................Low Fuel . 78
................Low Oil Pressure . 68, 525
......................Low Tire Pressure . 72
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 526
..........................Security System . 79
...........................Side Airbag Off . 70
.......................................Seat Belt . 67
...............................................SRS . 70
...................System Message . 75, 92
...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 73
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 71
............................VSA Activation . 71
.................................VSA System . 71
..................Individual Map Lights . 175
...............................Infant Restraint . 42
......................................Infant Seats . 42
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 500
..................................INFO Buttons . 85
.................................Inside Mirror . 168
.............................Inspection, Tire . 502
......................Instrument Panel . 65, 66
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 129
..............Instruments and Controls . 63
....................Integrated Sunshade . 181
.................................Interface Dial . 250
...............................Interior Lights . 174
........................................Introduction . i
...............................................iPod
. 286
.....................................Headlights . 124
........................................Aiming . 487
..................Automatic Lighting . 125
.........Daytime Running Lights . 126
..................High Beam Indicator . 76
.........High Beams, Turning on . 124
....................Lights On Indicator . 76
..........Low Beams, Turning on . 124
.......................Reminder Chime . 124
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 487
.................................Turning on . 124
...................................Headphones . 344
............................Head Restraints . 155
...............................Heated Mirror . 170
...............................Heaters, Seats . 162
.............Heating and Cooling . 190, 197
...............High-Low Beam Switch . 124
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 355
.......................Hood, Opening the . 401
...........................................Horn .4,121
Index
INDEX
I
V
０８／０３／１０ １８：４２：５９ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７２
2009 Pilot
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 515
.......................................Jack, Tire . 513
................................Jump Starting . 521
................................................Keys . 132
...........Keyless Memory Settings .
151
.......................Label, Certification . 540
...............Lane Change, Signaling . 124
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 21
....................Light Control Switch . 174
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 487
.................................Indicator . 65, 66
.......................................Interior . 174
.......................................Parking . 124
................................Turn Signal . 124
.............................Load Limit . 409, 438
....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 135
Locks
.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 135
............................Fuel Fill Door . 399
..................................Glove Box . 181
..................Lockout Prevention . 142
...............................Power Door . 136
..............................Tailgate . 142, 143
........................Low Coolant Level . 402
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 78
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 68, 525
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 542
............Luggage, Storing (cargo) . 408
...................Neutral Gear Position . 418
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 398
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 540
..................................Maintenance . 457
........................................Minder . 459
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 471
..........................................Safety . 458
....................................Schedule . 473
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 526
...........Memory, Driving Position . 171
.............................Message Display . 93
..........................Message Indicator . 75
...............................Meters, Gauges . 80
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 169
.................................Modifications . 407
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 407
.......................................Moonroof . 166
........................MP3 . 217, 241, 278, 298
.............Multi-Information Display . 85
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 398
...................................Odometer . 81, 87
.........................Odometer, Trip . 81, 87
....................Off-Highway Driving . 453
...................Off-Road Precautions . 453
Index
O
J
K
L
M
N
VI
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：０６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７３
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
Oil
........................Change, How to . 477
......................Change, When to . 459
......................Checking Engine . 402
...............................Life, Engine . 459
..............Pressure Indicator . 68, 525
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 476
.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 135
............................Outside Mirrors . 168
...............Outside Temperature . 83, 88
....................Overheating, Engine . 523
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 471
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 398
............Panel Brightness Control . 129
........................Park Gear Position . 418
...........................................Parking . 423
...............................Parking Brake . 167
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 69, 527
...............................Parking Lights . 124
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 423
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34
.............................PGM-FI System . 552
...................................Pollen Filter . 494
........................Power Door Locks . 136
..............Power Seat Adjustments . 152
...............Power Socket Locations . 177
............................Power Windows . 163
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 37
.....................General Guidelines . 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 42
.......Protecting Larger Children . 55
.........Protecting Small Children . 43
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 52
.............................Using LATCH . 47
...................Radiator Overheating . 523
Radio/Disc Sound
.......................System . 208, 225, 251
.................Radio Theft Protection . 311
................................RDS . 211, 228, 255
...........................Readiness Codes . 554
.......................Rear A/C Unit . 195, 202
............Rear Audio Control Panel . 319
........Rear Entertainment System . 315
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 490
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 394
...........................Rearview Mirror . 168
.......Rear Window Defogger . 192, 201
Rear Window Wiper and
.......................................Washer . 123
.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 152, 153
.........Reclining the Second Seats . 157
.......................Reminder Indicators . 67
................Remote Audio Controls . 309
.................Remote Control (RES) . 320
.....................Remote Transmitter . 148
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 477
..........................................Fuses . 529
................................Light Bulbs . 487
....................................Schedule . 459
................................Timing Belt . 486
...........................................Tires . 503
.............................Wiper Blades . 496
Index
INDEX
P
R
VII
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：１１ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７４
2009 Pilot
＊
＊
Replacing Seat Belt After a
............................................Crash . 23
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 402
...............................Restraint, Child . 37
..................Reverse Gear Position . 418
.................................Rotation Tire . 503
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 560
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags .
9
..................................
Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 14
.................................Seat Belts . 8, 15
...............Seats & Seat-Backs . 13, 14
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 60
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.............Satellite Radio, XM
. 234, 264
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 15
...............Additional Information . 20
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22
.....................................Cleaning . 494
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
................................Maintenance . 23
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 20, 67
...................System Components . 20
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15
...............................................Seats . 152
.......Adjusting the Second Seat . 157
..........Folding the Second Seat . 158
.............Folding the Third Seat . 159
........................Head Restraints . 155
.......................................Heaters . 162
......................Position Memory . 171
....................Third Row Access . 159
............................Security System . 347
Sensors
....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 29
Front Passenger’s Weight
.....................................Sensors . 29
......................Impact Sensors . 25, 26
...............................Serial Number . 540
...........................Service Intervals . 459
...........................Service Manual . 561
..............................Service Minder . 459
.........Service Station Procedures . 399
..........................Setting the Clock . 312
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 417
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 417
........................Shift Lock Release . 420
....................................Side Airbags . 30
................................Off Indicator . 33
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.................Replacement in . 488, 489
...............................Signaling Turns . 71
.....................................Snow Tires . 506
........................Sound System . 206, 250
Spare Tire
..............................Inflating . 501, 512
............................Specifications . 543
....................Specifications Charts . 542
................................Speed Control . 348
................................Speed Limiter . 420
...................................Speedometer . 80
Index
S
VIII
０８／０８／２９ １６：２６：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７５
2009 Pilot
CONTINUED
..........SRS, Additional Information . 24
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
.............................Airbag Service . 35
......Airbag System Components . 24
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 27
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 32
.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 70
..START (Ignition Key Position) . 135
.......................Starting the Engine . 415
...................Auto Control Mode . 415
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 416
................With a Dead Battery . 521
........Steam Coming from Engine . 523
Steering Wheel
................................Adjustment . 131
...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 135
......................Buttons . 309, 348, 361
Stereo Sound
...............System . 206, 207, 224, 250
..................Storage Compartment . 180
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 510
........................Sunglasses Holder . 181
........................................Sun Visor . 182
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 35
.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 70
...................System Components . 24
..................................Synthetic Oil . 477
.....................................Tachometer . 80
..........................................Tailgate . 142
...............................Glass Hatch . 146
......................Open Indicator . 11, 93
...............................Opening the . 142
.........................................Power . 143
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 490
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 511
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 544
.....Emissions Control Systems . 551
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 553
.......................Temperature Gauge . 80
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 205
....................Temperature, Outside . 88
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 22
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 53
................Theft Protection, Radio . 311
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 553
.Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel . 131
....................................Timing Belt . 486
....................................Tire Chains . 507
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 513
.................................Tire Labeling . 546
Tire Pressure Monitoring
............System (TPMS) . 424, 548
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 72, 427
.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 89, 428
Index
INDEX
T
IX
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：２０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７６
2009 Pilot
＊
...............................................Tires . 500
..............................Air Pressure . 500
.........................Checking Wear . 502
..........................Compact Spare . 512
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 544
......................................Inflation . 500
..................................Inspection . 502
..............................Maintenance . 503
...................................Replacing . 503
......................................Rotating . 503
...........................................Snow . 506
............................Specifications . 543
................................Tire Chains . 507
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 513
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 438
................Emergency Wrecker . 535
....Equipment and Accessories . 445
.............................Weight Limit . 438
.........................Trailer Loading . 438
.................Trailer Towing Tips . 450
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 482
...........................Fluid Selection . 483
..............Identification Number . 540
.............Shifting the Automatic . 417
.....................................Treadwear . 502
................................Trip Computer . 90
.................................Trip Meter . 81, 87
....................................Turn Signals . 71
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 513
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 511
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 544
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 398
..............USB Adapter Cable . 288, 299
.........USB Flash Memory Device . 296
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 478
................................Vanity Mirror . 183
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 409
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 542
....Vehicle Identification Number . 540
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
)
....................................System . 435
VSA Activation
....................Indicator . 71, 93, 435
.........................VSA Off Switch . 436
..VSA System Indicator . 71, 93, 435
.............................Vehicle Storage . 510
.....................................Ventilation . 204
.................................................VIN . 540
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 476
...........Voice Control System . 198, 250
..................................VTM-4 Lock . 422
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 60
..................Warranty Coverages . 559
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 481
............................Level Indicator . 94
...................................Operation . 122
Wheels
.............Adjusting the Steering . 131
............Alignment and Balance . 503
..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 507
.....................................Cleaning . 507
..........................Compact Spare . 512
..............................Wrench, Nut . 514
Index
U
V
W
X
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：２６ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７７
2009 Pilot
＊
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 164
................Operating the Power . 163
.........................Rear, Defogger . 128
Windshield
.....................................Cleaning . 122
...........................Defroster . 192, 201
.....................................Washers . 122
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 496
...................................Operation . 122
Rear Windshield Wiper and
...................................Washer . 123
......................WMA . 217, 241, 278, 298
....................................Worn Tires . 502
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 535
................XM Satellite Radio . 234, 264
:U.S.only
Index
X
XI
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：３０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５７８
2009 Pilot
4WD models only
4WD models only
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Rear Differential Fluid:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher. Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page ).
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid)
(see page ).
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
21.00 US gal (79.5
)
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Premium fuel is recommended
when towing in certain conditions
(see page ).
484
486
485
483
398
476
０８／０３／１０ １８：４３：５０ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０５８１
2009 Pilot
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SZAC00
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０８／０３／１０ １７：２７：０３ ３１ＳＺＡ６００ ０００１
2009 Pilot
